Dunema Zra Sanchi’i Ku Daycare Centre · Additional copies may be ordered from Intergraphics...

Illustrative Rendering

Dunema Zra Sanchi’i Ku

D a y c a r e C e n t r e Little Salmon Carmacks First Nation

SPECIFICATIONS

April 30, 2010

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00002 CARMACKS, YUKON PROJECT DIRECTORY APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 00002

PROJECT DIRECTORY

OWNER

Little Salmon Carmacks FN

Box 135

Carmacks, Yukon Y0B 1C0

T: 867-867-5576

F: 867- 863-5710

EXT 268

EXT 231 T: 867-863-5559

C: 867-332-1483

Contact:

James Baker, Exec. Director

[email protected]

Allen Skookum, Director

Capital Department

[email protected]

Kelly Skookum

Daycare Coordinator

[email protected]

ARCHITECT

ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN

Broadway Architects

1030 West 6th

Avenue

Vancouver, BC V6H 1A3

T: 604-731-0009

F: 604-737-9832

Contact:

Rob Sieniuc, MAIBC

[email protected]

ENVIRONMENTAL/GEOTECHNICAL

EBA Engineering Consultants Ltd.

Calcite Business Centre Unit 6

151 Industrial Road

Whitehorse, Yukon Y1A 2V3

T: 867-668-2071

F: 867-668-4340

EXT 231

T: 867-668-2071

EXT: 226

Contact:

Ryan Martin, MEng, PEng

[email protected]

James Buyck

[email protected]

STRUCTURAL

Chiu Hippmann Engineering Inc.

1030 West 6th

Avenue

Vancouver, BC V6H 1A3

T: 604-737-9830

F: 604-737-9832

Contact:

Carlos Chiu, PEng

[email protected]

Tim Hippmann

[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]








LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00002 CARMACKS, YUKON PROJECT DIRECTORY APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

MECHANICAL

Dec Design Mechanical Consultants

#309 – 713 Columbia Street

New Westminster, BC V3M 1B2

T: 604-525-3341

F: 604-525-3147

Contact:

Bill Vaughan, PEng

[email protected]

ELECTRICAL

Falcon Engineering Ltd.

210 - 1715 Dickson Ave.

Kelowna, BC V1Y 9G6

T: 250-762-9993

F: 250-861-3290

Contact:

Geoff Hann, PEng

[email protected]

CODE AND FIRE PROTECTION

Protection Engineering Inc.

300 - 68 East Second Ave.

Vancouver, BC V5T 1B1

T: 604-682-0388

F: 604-682-6105

Contact:

Bill May, PEng

[email protected]

Gerard Sass, PEng

[email protected]

REGIONAL AUTHORITY

Building Permits & Inspectors

Dawson City, Yukon Y1A 5V1

T: 867-993-5803

F: 867-993-6031

Contact:

Ron Bramadat

[email protected]

CONTRACTOR

Contact:







LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00010 CARMACKS, YUKON TABLE OF CONTENTS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 00010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Form, Conditions of Contract 00002 Project Directory 00010 Table of Contents 00100 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Form 00300 A Bid Form Appendix A List of Bid Documents 00300 B Bid Form Appendix B List of Sub Contractors 00300 C Bid Form Appendix C Alternate Prices 00300 D Bid Form Appendix D Separate Prices 00300 E Bid Form Appendix E Unit Prices 00300 F Bid Form Appendix F Cash Allowance 00300 G Bid Form Appendix G Local Labour & Supplies Statement 00300 H Bid Form Appendix H Fax Amendment 00800 Supplementary General Conditions

Division 1 General Requirements 01010 Summary of Work 01220 General Instructions 01315 Project Meetings 01330 Submittal Procedures 01350 Special Project Procedures 01440 Indoor Air Quality 01505 Construction Waste Management 01630 Product Substitution Procedure 01631 Substitution Request Form 01720 Project Records 01770 Closeout Procedures 01810 Commissioning Division 2 Sitework 02300 Earthwork 02555 Below Grade Air Preheat System 02780 Unit Pavers 02844 Berm Construction 02845 Boulder Movement and Placement 02900 Planting, Tree Retention and Relocation Division 3 Concrete 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03305 Concrete Waterproofing 03350 Light Weight Concrete 03400 Pre-Cast Concrete Division 4 Masonry 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 04850 Stone Veneer


Division 5 Metals 05500 Metal Fabrications Division 6 Wood and Plastics 06100 Rough Carpentry 06130 Heavy Timber Construction 06181 Glue Laminated Units 06190 Wood Trusses (By Structural) 06200 Finish Carpentry 06400 Architectural Woodwork Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07210 Building Insulation 07215 Sprayed on Foam Insulation 07216 Icynene Spray Foam 07290 Weather Resistive Barrier 07400 Metal Roofing 07469 Wood Siding 07500 Membrane Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07840 Firestopping 07900 Joint Sealers Division 8 Doors and Windows 08100 Metal Doors and Frames 08210 Wood Doors 08336 Side Coiling Grilles 08322 Rolling Shutters 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront 08520 Vinyl Windows 08710 Finish Hardware (Submit Schedule) 08800 Glazing Division 9 Finishes 09250 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09300 Tile 09640 Wood Flooring 09650 Resilient Flooring 09641 Engineered Wood Flooring 09900 Paints and Coatings Division 10 Specialties 10400 Identification Devices 10520 Fire Extinguishers 10550 Postal Specialties 10820 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10990 Miscellaneous Specialties


Division 11 Equipment 11450 Residential Appliances (N.I.C.) Install only Division 12 Furnishings 12490 Window Treatments Division 13 Special Construction N/A Division 15 Mechanical (By Others) Division 16 Electrical Appendices 17500 Appendix A Room Schedule Appendix B Door Schedule Appendix C Window Schedule

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00100 CARMACKS, YUKON INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS: DAYCARE CENTER - TENDER B

CLAUSE 1

GENERAL

1.1 BID CALL: DAYCARE CENTRE - TENDER B

The purpose of this bid call is to obtain formal offers from invited General Contractors to construct and complete the Daycare Centre for the Little Salmon Carmacks First Nation and related civil works as fully described in these documents (Tender B).. The First Nation is committed to the principles and practices of environmental sustainability. It is their intention that Dunema Zra Sanch’i Ku Daycare Centre, Carmacks, Yukon, be constructed as a healthy, energy efficient, sustainable building in as environmentally responsible a manner as practical. An associated “Services Garage” will be tendered separately as part of the Health & Social Centre Building (Tender A). The intent is that this associated facility will achieve substantial completion in conjunction with Little Salmon Carmacks First Nation Daycare Centre. Occupancy of LSCFN Daycare Centre is contingent on completion of the Services Garage as this facility will house LSCFN Daycare Centre’s fire protection, emergency power, primary exchange heating components and other related services.

1.2 BID CALL (BOTH PROJECTS): IF UNDERTAKEN BY SAME CONTRACTOR

DAYCARE CENTRE – TENDER B HEALTH SOCIAL CENTRE – TENDER A (SEPARATE DOCUMENTS)

For contractors bidding on both the Health Social Centre (Tender A this tender) and the Daycare Centre (Tender B – separate documents), in addition to providing individual prices for each project, please complete bid form 1.1b indicating a total price if both projects are undertaken by the same contractor.

1.1b. STIPULATED PRICE BID FORM - Health Social (Tender A) & Daycare (Tender B)

1.3 AVAILABILITY OF DOCUMENTS AND DEPOSIT

A maximum of two (2) sets of Tender documents may be obtained by General Contractors on April 30, 2010, from the offices of EBA Engineering Consultants or Broadway Architects upon payment of $150.00 per set ($300 for 2) by certified cheque made payable to Broadway Architects. This sum will be refunded if and when the documents are returned intact and in good condition within 30 days of tender closing. Additional copies may be ordered from Intergraphics (Whitehorse) at their standard rates for same.

EBA Engineering Consultants Ltd. Calcite Business Centre, Unit 6-151 Industrial Road Whitehorse, Yukon Y1A 2V3 Contact: James Buyck (Ext 226) or Ryan Martin (Ext 231)

Tel: 867-668-2071

Broadway Architects Contact: Rob Sieniuc 1030 West 6th Avenue Vancouver, BC V6H 1A3 Tel: 604-731-0009 Cell: 604-218-8252


Plans and specifications may also be viewed at the Consultant’s office in Vancouver and at the following locations:

1. EBA Engineering Consultants Ltd., Whitehorse, Yukon 2. Or at offices of Little Salmon Carmacks First Nation in Carmacks, Yukon

Electronic Digital Versions (PDFs) will be made available on Broadway Architects website: www.broadwayarchitects.com

1.3 DOCUMENTS

.1 Carefully examine the following information. Failure to follow these instructions may result in bid disqualification.

.2 BID DOCUMENTS

(a) Invitation to Bid; (b) Instructions to Bidders; (c) Bid Form; (d) Articles of Agreement (CCDC 2 - 2008); (e) General Conditions (CCDC 2 - 2008); (f) Supplementary Conditions; (g) Project Specific Amendments, if any; (h) General Requirements; (i) Drawings and Specifications; (j) Addenda and Appendices, if any. .3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

.1 Upon award of contract the Contract Documents consist only of (b) to (j) above.

.4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS

.1 Upon receipt of bidding documents ensure a complete set has been obtained (including drawings and specifications). Notify the Consultant if documents are incomplete. There will be no responsibility incurred by the Consultant or the Owner in the event of bids being based on an incomplete set of bidding documents or misinterpretations of them.

1.4 SITE VISIT

.1 To arrange a guided site visit please contact:

Allen Skookum or James Baker @ 867-867-5576

.2 Tenderers must inform themselves fully of conditions relating to the Work to be performed and shall inspect the site(s) and surrounding area before submitting a bid and shall familiarize themselves with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, including any federal, provincial, or jurisdictional laws, ordinances, rules or regulations. Be thoroughly familiar with Drawings, Specifications and Terms and Covenants of the Contract Documents, including geotechnical report.

Contact Consultant before Tender Close if concerns exist relating to the ability to execute design intent on site specified. Failure to do so will not relieve the successful tenderer of the obligation to enter into contract and to carry out design intent and all Work for the consideration as set forth in the offer.

http://www.broadwayarchitects.com/


1.5 BIDDING INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Submit sealed tenders in duplicate on Bid Form, signed under seal, executed and dated, with other documentation required by the Contract Documents to:

LITTLE SALMON CARMACKS FIRST NATION

Attention: James Baker Executive Director c/o EBA Engineering Consultants Ltd. Calcite Business Centre, Unit 6-151 Industrial Road Whitehorse, Yukon Y1A 2V3 No later than: 3:00 pm local time (Whitehorse, Yukon), Thursday, May 18, 2010

No Bid will be received or accepted after the specified closing time. Tenders submitted after the above time will be returned to the Tenderer, unopened. Bids will be opened privately by LSCFN. Date, location and time as determined by LSCFN.

No indication of award will be made until all Bids are reviewed for compliance with Bid Documents. Tenders will be contacted with Bid results after deliberations.

1.6 IRREVOCABILITY OF TENDER

Bids are irrevocable and are to remain open for thirty-one (31) days after bid closing date. The successful Bidder will be notified in writing, through a "Notice of Award", and within seven (7) days of such notification, will be required to enter into a contract with the Owner for completion of the work in accordance with the bidder's accepted offer. The award of the contract is subject to the Owner’s approval. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all offers, as may be in its best interests, without explanation of any kind.

CLAUSE 2 - PRE-BID INQUIRIES

2.1 Direct inquiries relating to Bid Documents, only to the Consultant/Owner at:

Broadway Architects 1030 West 6th Avenue Vancouver, BC V6H 1A3 Attention: Rob Sieniuc, MAIBC Telephone: (604) 731-0009 Fax: (604) 737-9832

Cell: 604-218-8252 Email: [email protected]

CLAUSE 3 - PARTICULARS AFFECTING BID PRICE

3.1 MATERIALS

.1 Establish the Bid Price based on the use of materials specified in Drawings and Specifications.

.2 Proposed alternatives to materials specified will be considered during the bidding period only if full descriptive data are submitted in writing to the Consultant/Owner at least five ( 5 ) Working Days before the bid closing date.

.3 Approved alternatives will be incorporated in the Drawings and Specifications by issuance of an Addendum.



3.2 CONDITIONS RELATED TO THE WORK

.1 Become familiar with the site and existing conditions prior to submitting a bid and make allowances for conditions related to the Work.

.2 Claims for an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time arising from observable conditions will be rejected by the Owner.

3.3 TAXES

.1 The Bid Price includes all applicable taxes in force at the time of bidding and related to the progress of the Work except Value Added Tax (GST).

.2 The successful bidder agrees to:

.1 Pay applicable taxes in force during and related to progress of the Work and Materials.

.2 Pay Social Service tax (PST), if applicable on materials incorporated into the Work and on machinery, equipment and supplies used to carry out the Contract. Confirm if HST tax is payable on materials, machinery, equipment or supplies that have been purchased out of Province (British Columbia) for this project.

3 Submit a statutory declaration at Substantial Performance of the Work, stating all taxes have been paid in full to date when requested to do so by the Owner.

CLAUSE 4 - COMPLETION OF BID FORM

4.1 COMPLETION OF BID FORM

.1 Complete the bid on the Bid Form included with the Bid Documents in a non-erasable medium and execute in accordance with provisions of Clause 5 of the Instructions to Bidders, - EXECUTION OF THE BID.

.2 If required, state the number of weeks within which the bidder will Substantially Perform the Work.

.3 Initial erasures or corrections to entries on the Bid Form.

.4 Indicate receipt of Addenda.

.5 The Owner may reject the bid if the Bid Form has alterations, qualifications or omissions.

.6 Ensure Subcontractor List (Appendix) has either a subcontractor's name or name of bidder entered against each item. Leave none incomplete. Where more than one subcontractor is involved with one listed item of work, enter each name and indicate division of work.

CLAUSE 5 - EXECUTION OF THE BID

5.1 EXECUTION OF THE BID

.1 Execute the Bid Form in one of the following ways:

.1 Limited Company: Include the company’s full name and the name(s) and status of the authorized signing officer(s) in the spaces provided for that purpose. Affix the signature(s) of authorized officer(s) and date the Form; or

.2 Partnership: Print the partnership name and the name(s) of the person(s) signing in the spaces provided. Affix the signature of one or more of the authorized partners, who shall sign in the presence of a witness who shall also sign and date the Form; or

.3 Sole Proprietor: Print the business name and the name of the sole proprietor in the spaces provided. The sole proprietor shall sign and date the Form in the presence of a witness who shall also sign and date the Form.


CLAUSE 6 - DELIVERY OF THE BID

6.1 DELIVERY OF THE BID

.1 Enclose the properly completed and executed Bid Form in a properly addressed envelope.

.2 Ensure the name and address of the bidder, the project name, (and project number where provided by the Owner) appear on the envelope face.

.3 Seal the envelope and deliver it to the address stated in the Invitation to Bid prior to the time and date specified for the closing of bids.

.4 The Owner or Owners representative will immediately record the date and time on envelopes containing bids and on bid revisions received by fax and this information will take precedence over machine-initiated date and time information transmitted through a fax machine.

.5 Bids and other related documents received after the stated time and date of closing will not be considered by the Owner.

.6 The Owner is neither liable nor responsible for costs incurred by bidders in the preparation, submission, or presentation of the bid. Bid documents become the property of the Owner.

CLAUSE 7 - REVISION OF THE BID

7.1 REVISION OF THE BID

.1 A Bid Form already delivered to the Owner may only be revised in the manner described in paragraph 7.2 of this Clause, and to qualify, the revision(s) shall be received by the Owner at the address stated in the Invitation to Bid prior to the time and date specified there for the closing of bids. Ensure revision(s) plainly refers to a particular bidder.

.2 Revisions will be accepted by either: signed letter delivered to the address stated in the Invitation to Bid, or, faxed to the number designated in the Invitation to Bid.

Note: On day of closing, sent all faxes to EBA Engineering Consultants @1- 867-668-4340 Faxes sent to Broadway Architects offices will not be accepted.

.3 Only the bidder's entries on the delivered Bid Form may be revised; the revision shall state only the amount by which a bid figure is to be increased or decreased (except itemized, alternative or unit prices as described in 7.4), or specific directions as to the exclusion or inclusion of particular words.

.4 Where itemized, alternative, or unit prices are being revised, submit a new price that replaces the previously submitted price.

.5 Ensure faxed revisions to the original bid are clearly legible. State monetary revisions to the bid amount numerically and in writing. Revisions shall clearly indicate an "Increase" or "Decrease" in the Bid amount, Alternative Price, Unit Price, or Separate price.

.6 For faxed revisions, the clock used for the official bid closing time shall govern.

.7 Bidders are warned that faxed revisions are submitted solely at their risk and will not be considered received until they have been received and printed at the designated fax number, and date and time of the revision has been recorded by hand by the Owner prior to bid closing. The Owner’s hand written date and time shall take precedence over machine generated time and date.


CLAUSE 8 - SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

8.1 BID BONDS

.1 Ensure the Bid Form is accompanied by a bid bond in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Bid Price. Certified cheques and guaranteed letters of credit will not be accepted.

.2 Ensure the bid bond is issued on a CCDC 220 Bid Bond form or other form approved by the Surety Association of Canada and issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner.

.3 If a successful bidder declines to enter a Contract within the period set out in the Bid Form, or a further agreed period of time, the principal and surety will be required to pay to the Owner a sum equivalent to the difference between the principal's bid and the accepted bid or ten percent (10%) of the principal's bid, whichever is the lesser.

8.2 PERFORMANCE BONDS AND LABOUR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BONDS

.1 The successful bidder agrees to:

.1 Provide a Performance Bond and a Labour and Material Payment Bond each in the amount of fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price.

.2 Provide these bonds within ten (10) Working Days of contract award. Maintain bonds in good standing until Contract fulfillment. Ensure requirements of GC 12.3 – WARRANTY are met and payment obligations arising under the Contract are made while bonds are still in place.

.3 Ensure the Performance Bond is issued on CCDC-221 Performance Bond form, and Labour and Material Performance Bond is issued on CCDC-222 Labour and Material Performance Bond form or other forms approved by the Surety Association of Canada and issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner.

.4 Include bonding costs in the Bid Price.

.5 Ensure the obligee on the bonds is the Owner.

CLAUSE 9 - ACCEPTANCE OF THE BID

9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF THE BID

.1 The lowest or any bid will not necessarily be accepted.

.2 The Owner, at its sole discretion, may accept or reject any or all of the Alternative Prices submitted in the Bid Documents. Alternative Prices will not be considered in determining the successful bidder.

.3 Alternative Prices listed in the Bid Documents shall remain open for acceptance by the Owner for the period stated in the Bid Documents, from the time and date specified for closing of bids.

.4 Bids which contain qualifying conditions or otherwise fail to conform to these Instructions to Bidders may, at the sole discretion of the Owner, be disqualified or rejected.

.5 The Owner retains the separate right to waive irregularities in the Bid Form if, at the Owner’s discretion, such irregularities are of a minor or technical nature and have not provided the bidder with a competitive advantage. Errors of a clerical or technical nature are not grounds for a bidder to revoke a bid. Bidding irregularities will be reviewed generally in accordance with 2.3 Guideline for Administering Bidding Irregularities of the British Columbia Documents Committee (BCDC) in effect at the time of bid closing.

.6 In the event a single bid is received, the Owner may open the bid privately without reference to the bidder. If the bid is opened and it is in excess of the Owner's budget, the Owner reserves


the right to re-issue the Bid Documents for new public re-bid without revisions being made to the Bid Documents and without disclosing the single Bid Price. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject a single bid.

.7 The Owner has the right to enter into over-budget negotiations with the lowest compliant bidder or a single bidder, without cancellation of all bids or consideration to other bidders, and to require that bidder to negotiate with Subcontractors named on their Bid Form.

CLAUSE 10 - OWNER PROVIDED INSURANCE

.1 Refer to GC 11.1 - INSURANCE, GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION and Supplementary Condition(s).

CLAUSE 11 - CONTRACTOR PROVIDED INSURANCE

.1 Refer to GC 11.1 - Insurance, GC 12.1 - Indemnification and Supplementary Condition(s).

CLAUSE 12 - WORKERS’ COMPENSATION BOARD LETTER

.1 After bid closing, upon request, the lowest compliant bidder agrees to provide a Workers’ Compensation Board Letter of Good Standing within forty-eight (48) hours.

CLAUSE 12 - OTHER

12.1 ADDENDA

.1 Addenda: Prior to closing date of Bids, necessary clarification of Drawings, Specifications or other bidding documents will be in the form of written addenda only. The Consultant will not be responsible for verbal or other explanations in the interpretation of Drawings and Specifications. Addenda issued shall become part of the Contract DocumentsT

.2 A Where Contract Documents specify a material or method use that material or methods unless Consultant has approved a substitution by addendum.

.3 Substitutions: Where Contract Documents state “or approved alternative” the Consultant may consider substitution requests if received five (5) working days prior to close of Tender and if received on form provided in Section 01631 Substitution Request Form.

.4 Should discrepancies or ambiguities occur between Drawings and Specifications, obtain a written ruling from the Consultant, prior to submitting Bid.

.5 Acknowledge receipt of addenda by listing them on Bid Form.

.6 Failure to acknowledge receipt of addenda will invalidate the bid.

.7 Ensure that subcontractors and suppliers include in their quotations the contents of all Addenda.

.8 The Consultant may extend the tender period if they receive notification of an error or omission with respect to the tender documents within four working days prior to closing date. Registered plan holders will be informed of this decision.

12.2 ACCOMMODATIONS

.1 Temporary Accommodation: Contractors will be responsible for providing accommodation and meals for their crews. Contractors are encouraged to make use of local suppliers. Confirm with LSCFN if contractors will be able to park own trailers on site as space is limited

.2 Location of temporary accommodation to be determined by the Owner. Contact James Baker or Allen Skookum, Tel: 867-867-5576 for details and any other proposed alternate arrangements.


.3 Temporary power is available at the site but contactors will be responsible for providing the temporary services. Trucked water is available and can be purchased from a local supplier.

.4 Portable, temporary washroom facilities will be contractor’s responsibility. Pump out services can be arranged with LSCFN.

.5 Contact LSCFN to see if camp/washroom trailers are available from LSCFN for rent

12.3 RIGHT TO REJECT

.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all of the bids and to accept any bid it considers advantageous. The lowest or any of the bid(s) may not be accepted if the Owner determines, at its sole discretion and after appropriate investigation and evaluation, that:

1. The financial or work references, in the opinion of the Owner, are unsatisfactory; OR

2. The bidder or any company with whom the bidder is associated, has performed work for the Owner in the past two (2) years in an unsatisfactory way; OR

3. In the opinion of the Owner, the bidder appears to be unable to fully and properly perform its contractual obligations during the whole life of the contract; OR

4. The tender must be cancelled due to financing problems or changing economic circumstances; OR

5. Information becomes available after tender closing which significantly changes the scope or extent of the project; OR

6. The lowest bid is not the most economical to the tender caller; OR

7. The bids, or any of the bids, exceed the tender spending approval; OR

8. Less than three (3) bids were received.

9.

12.4 RIGHT TO INCREASE OR DECREASE THE WORK

.1 Owner reserves the right to increase or decrease, or to entirely eliminate certain items from the Work if found desirable or expedient.

12.5 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

.1 Anticipated date for commencing work is two (2) weeks after the award of contract, targeted for the end of May, 2010. It is the Owner’s objective to have the project to lock-up (windows, temp doors, water proofed roof - excluding metal work) prior to the onset of extreme winter conditions before November 15, 2010. Substantial completion is targeted for the end of December, 2011 with any minor remaining exterior work on the building/ site works including Services Garage concluding as weather permits. Contractors are to advise LSCFN if this target schedule is achievable and account for measures (eg: temporary heating) required to facilitate construction over the winter period. Bidders shall include in their price cost to cover any anticipated special requirements over this period.

12.6 LOCAL LABOUR AND LOCAL SUPPLIERS

.1 The Little Salmon Carmacks First Nation has indicated that some First Nation members have experience as painters, cooks, carpenter helpers, labourers, janitorial service or other trade workers and are interested in working on this project. Tenderers should (where possible and cost effective) maximize use of local LSCFN labour and local suppliers. It is therefore recommended that Tenderers contact LSCFN c/o James Baker to discuss labour needs and availability. The estimated number of LSCFN labour days shall be noted on Bid Form Appendix F and will become part of the consideration during award deliberations.


.2 Subcontracts/Suppliers

1. Subcontractors to be used on this project are to be listed in Appendix “B” bound herein.

2. The owner has pre-qualified Fireweed Painting of Carmacks for consideration of the

painting component of the work.

Contractors to contact Frank Birckel @ (867) 863-5100 or 867-333-0165 (cell) for pricing.

3. A list of pre-qualified roofing applicators is listed below for consideration by contractors.

All roofing applicators to be experienced members in good standing with roofing

associations such as R.C.A.B.C. and for such work.

Lam Metal Contracting Ltd.

Jack Lam Tel:1 604-430-3233

[email protected]

Summit Steel Cladding Inc.

Chris McBurney Tel: 604-533-4001 Ext 206

[email protected]

4. The following window manufacturer has been pre-qualified for consideration for supply of

the double, triple and quad vinyl framed windows.

Northerm Windows & Doors

#1 – 17 Burns Road

Whitehorse, Y1A 4Z3

Travis Hervoly/ Chris Isaak Tel:1 867-668-5088

[email protected] [email protected]

END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS





LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00300 CARMACKS, YUKON BID FORM APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

1.1 BID FORM (NOTE: USE ATTACHED FORM 1.1 B. IF TENDERING ON BOTH PROJECTS)

A. STIPULATED PRICE BID FORM – DAYCARE CENTRE (TENDER B)

PROJECT: DAYCARE CENTRE Carmacks, Yukon

From (Bidder):

company name

street address or postal box number

city/town, province and postal code ( )

( )

Bidders Phone Bidders Fax To (Owner): LITTLE SALMON CARMACKS FIRST NATION

c/o James Baker, Executive Director Box 135, Carmacks, Yukon Y0B 1C0

We, the undersigned, having examined the Bid Documents for the above named project/ contract, including Addendum Number(s) , and having visited the Place of the Work, hereby offer to perform the Work (Daycare Tender A)- in accordance with the Bid Documents, for the stipulated bid price of: $ amount in writing

in Canadian dollars, excluding Value Added Taxes.

$ in Canadian dollars, excluding Value Added Taxes. amount in figures We, the undersigned, declare that: (a) we agree to attain Substantial Performance of the Work within ___________ months after receiving

notice of contract award, and acknowledge that the construction duration may be considered by the Owner in evaluating the bid and determining contract award. The date of contract award shall be the date the letter of award is sent to the bidder.

(b) we have arrived at this bid without collusion with any competitor, (c) this bid is open to acceptance by the Owner for a period of days from the date of bid

closing, and (d) all bid form supplements called for by the Bid Documents form an integral part of this bid.


Signatures: Signed and submitted by: company name name and title of authorized signing officer signature of authorized signing officer name of witness signature of witness name and title of authorized signing officer

signature of authorized signing officer name of witness signature of witness Dated this day of , 20 .


BID FORM: BOTH LSCFN PROJECTS

B. STIPULATED PRICE BID FORM - HEALTH SOCIAL (TENDER A) & DAYCARE (TENDER B)

PROJECTS: HEALTH & SOCIAL CENTRE (TENDER A) DAYCARE CENTRE (TENDER B) Carmacks, Yukon From (Bidder):

company name

street address or postal box number

city/town, province and postal code ( )

( )

Bidders Phone Bidders Fax To (Owner): LITTLE SALMON CARMACKS FIRST NATION

c/o James Baker, Executive Director Box 135, Carmacks, Yukon Y0B 1C0

We, the undersigned, having examined the Bid Documents for both above named projects/ contract, including Addendum Number(s) , and having visited the Place of the Work, hereby offer to perform the Work - in accordance with the Bid Documents, for the stipulated bid price of:

Health Social Center – (Tender A) (including Services Garage) $ amount in writing in Canadian dollars, excluding Value Added Taxes.

$ in Canadian dollars, excluding Value Added Taxes. amount in figures

Daycare Center – (Tender B) $ amount in writing in Canadian dollars, excluding Value Added Taxes.

$ in Canadian dollars, excluding Value Added Taxes. amount in figures


Health Social Center – (Tender A) and Daycare (Tender B) together as one complete project (including Services Garage) $ amount in writing in Canadian dollars, excluding Value Added Taxes.

$ in Canadian dollars, excluding Value Added Taxes. amount in figures We, the undersigned, declare that: (c) we agree to attain Substantial Performance of the Work within ___________ months after receiving

notice of contract award, and acknowledge that the construction duration may be considered by the Owner in evaluating the bid and determining contract award. The date of contract award shall be the date the letter of award is sent to the bidder.

(d) we have arrived at this bid without collusion with any competitor, (c) this bid is open to acceptance by the Owner for a period of days from the date of bid

closing, and (d) all bid form supplements called for by the Bid Documents form an integral part of this bid.

Signatures: Signed and submitted by:

company name name and title of authorized signing officer signature of authorized signing officer name of witness signature of witness name and title of authorized signing officer signature of authorized signing officer name of witness signature of witness Dated this day of , 20 .


1.2 BID BOND

A. Accompanying this Bid is a Bid Bond in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Stipulated Bid Price in favour of the Owner issued by a surety company registered to carry on business in the Yukon.

1.3 APPENDICES TO BID

A. The information on Subcontractors, Alternate Prices, Separate Prices, Unit Prices and Cash Allowances as called for in the Bid Documents is provided in the attached Appendices and forms an integral part of this Bid.

1.4 NOTIFICATION OF ACCEPTANCE

A. If notified in writing by the Owner of acceptance of this bid within thirty one calendar days after the bid closing date, we will:

1. Actively commence the Work of the Contract within seven (7) days of receipt of such written notice.

2. Enter into and execute the Contract stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders and return the executed Contract to the Owner within seven days of receipt.

3. Furnish a certified copy of the Contractor's insurance called for in the General Conditions within seven days of notification of acceptance or prior to commencement of Work if earlier.

4. Furnish a Performance Bond as specified in the Contract Documents within 14 days of receipt of notification of acceptance.

5. Provide a Labour and Materials Bond as specified in the Contract Documents within 14 days of notification of acceptance.

6. Furnish in triplicate within 14 days of notification of acceptance, a detailed construction schedule for review by the Consultant, showing the order in which we will start the Work and estimated dates of completion of the major components of the Work.

7. Furnish within 14 days of notifications of acceptance, a general analysis of the Bid Price, showing the amounts for various portions of the Work and the work of our proposed Subcontractors, in the same format as the Specifications Index, with a total price consistent with the amount of our Bid Price.

8. Furnish a complete list of all material suppliers within 14 days of notification of acceptance.

1.5 ADDENDA

A. Acknowledgment of receipt of the following addenda (both projects) to the Contract Documents is hereby made:

1. Addendum No. _________ dated _______________ : _____ pages






THIS PAGE REPRESENTS CCDC-2 2008 (latest most updated version)

END OF BID FORM

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00300 CARMACKS, YUKON BID FORM – APPENDIX A: LIST OF BID DOCUMENTS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 00300

BID FORM – APPENDIX A: LIST OF BID DOCUMENTS

PROJECT: Daycare Centre (Tender B), Carmacks, Yukon

SUBMITTED BY:

1.1 LIST OF BID DOCUMENTS

A. The following is the list or description of the Bid Documents referred to in the Bid for the above named Project.

1. Instructions To Bidders

2. Stipulated Price Bid Form including Appendices “A” to “H”

3. Articles of Agreement (Standard Construction Document CCDC2, 2008, Agreement, Definitions, The General Conditions Of The Stipulated Price Contract – full document not included

4. Supplementary Conditions.

5. Specifications: (Architectural) Refer to Table of Contents.

6. Specifications: Division 15 (under separate cover- Mechanical)

7. Addenda and Appendices, if any

8. Consultant Drawings (listing below as a guide only – confirm with final sets received):

ARCHITECTURAL (Broadway Architects)

A1 Cover Sheet/Index A2 Illustrative Perspectives 1 A3 Illustrative Perspectives 2 A4 General Notes A5 Location/Aerial Photo A6 Community Site Plan A7 Foundation Plan A8 Main Floor Plan A9 Reflective Ceiling/Roof Plan A10 Elevations A11 Sections AA, BB, CC A12 Sections DD, EE, FF A13 Details - Wall A14 Details - Wall A15 Details - Log A16 Details – Window/Rscreen

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00300 CARMACKS, YUKON BID FORM – APPENDIX A: LIST OF BID DOCUMENTS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

ARCHITECTURAL (continued)

A17 Room Schedule A18 Door Schedule A19 Window Schedule A20 Details - Bath A21 Details – Millwork - Servery A23 Details – Office/Window Box Note: Confirm below (names and listing) with drawings received STRUCTURAL (Chiu Hippmann Engineering Inc.)

S1 Structural Notes S2 Foundation Plan S3 Main Floor Plan/Roof Framing S4 Details/Sections S5 Details/Sections S6 Details/Sections S7 Details/Sections MECHANICAL (Dec Design Mechanical Consultants Ltd.)

P1 Site Plan - Plumbing P2 Foundation Pl - Plumbing P3 Floor Plan - Plumbing P4 Details – Plumbing & Fire Protection M1 Foundation Plan - HVAC M2 Main Floor HVAC M3 Schematics - HVAC FIRE SUPPRESSION (Protection Engineering Inc)

FP1 Site Plan FP2 Daycare Floor Plan/Details ELECTRICAL (Falcon Engineering Ltd)

E1 Site Plan,Symbol, Legend, Details E2 Floor Plan – Lighting, Power, Auxiliaries E3 Distribution, Schedules E4 Schedules E5 Outline Specification SEPTIC (EBA Consultants)

FIGURE 1 Specifications

END OF BID FORM - APPENDIX A

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00300 CARMACKS, YUKON BID FORM – APPENDIX B APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

BID FORM – APPENDIX B – List of Subcontractors

PROJECT: Daycare Centre, Carmacks, Yukon

SUBMITTED BY (BIDDER): company name

We, the above named bidder, propose to use for the above named project/contract, the Subcontractors named below:

Item of Work Name of Subcontractor

END OF BID FORM – APPENDIX B

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00300 CARMACKS, YUKON BID FORM – APPENDIX C: ALTERNATE PRICES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

BID FORM – APPENDIX C: ALTERNATE PRICES


SUBMITTED BY: company name

1.1 ALTERNATE PRICES

We, the above named bidder, offer the alternative prices requested below. The amount to be added to, or deducted from, our bid price (as entered in the Bid Form) is entered for each alternative requested. These prices do NOT include Value Added Taxes. If there is no change to the bid price for an alternative, we

have so indicated. It is understood that:

(a) the Owner may accept any of the alternatives and corresponding alternative prices in any order or combination, including all or none,

(b) alternatives and alternative prices are open for acceptance by the Owner for the same period of time as the bid price, not withstanding the award of the Contract.

(c) the Work of the Contract and the Contract Price will reflect the alternatives and alternative prices, if any, accepted by the Owner at the time of contract award, and

(d) acceptance of any alternatives will not affect the bid price contract completion time, unless we have specifically indicated an increase or decrease in time, in number of days, on account of a particular alternative.

DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATIVE EFFECT ON BID PRICE

ADD DEDUCT

Alternate Price No. 1: $ $

Compacted gravel in lieu of unit pavers at front entry, south patio

Time (in Days)

Alternate Price No. 2: $ $

Treated Wood deck at south patio in lieu of concrete unit pavers

Time (in Days)

END OF BID FORM – APPENDIX C

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00300 CARMACKS, YUKON BID FORM – APPENDIX D: SEPARATE PRICES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

BID FORM – APPENDIX D: SEPARATE PRICES

PROJECT: Dunema Zra Sanch’i Ku Daycare Centre, Carmacks, Yukon

SUBMITTED BY:

1.1 SEPARATE PRICES

A. The following are our values for the work listed hereunder. Such work and amounts are included in our Stipulated Bid Price. These Separate Prices do NOT include GST or any other value added taxes..

1.2

DESCRIPTION AMOUNT ($)

1. Provide a separate price for following Site Works:

Preparing rough &final grades, topping with crushed gravel entry road, parking lot as indicated on drawings, street lighting & plug ins (per Electrical Engineer) and any other site work as noted

1.Entry Road (confirm all areas) approx width 24’ 2. Parking Lot and 1 small parking on west 3. South play area – site preparation and final grading including the circular area (demarcated and to final grade) 4. gravel walkway to Social Health building as indicated 5. 8 stalls, c/w log markers and plug-ins 6. sidewalks, entry area, patio areas as indicated 7. Sodded areas around front entry and adjacent to building & seeded all disturbed areas.

$____________

2. Provide a separate price for provision of Septic System

(per EBA Engineering documents)

$____________

Provide horizontal window blinds at windows and doors with accessories for attachment, for a complete installation. All child rooms, dining area, activity area, . High triangular and circular windows excluded

$___________

END OF BID FORM – APPENDIX D

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00300 CARMACKS, YUKON BID FORM – APPENDIX E: UNITPRICES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 00300 BID FORM – APPENDIX E: UNIT PRICES

PROJECT: Health & Social Centre, Carmacks, Yukon

SUBMITTED BY:

1.1 UNIT PRICES

A. The following are our values for the work listed hereunder. These Unit Prices do NOT include GST.

NO. ITEM UNIT OF MEASURE AMOUNT ($) 1. Removal of organic material not suitable for use as

subgrade/ select clearing of site

Per cubic yard $____________

2. Supply and installation of ten (10) square feet of unit pavers over 8” base of compacted sand specified in Section 02780 Unit Pavers.

Per ten (10) s.f. $____________

3. Trenching to 8’ deep, 3 ‘ wide for provision of water/heating lines

lineal ft $____________

4. Construct gravel roadway bed, parking

lump sum $____________

5. Install culvert at entrance

lump sum $____________

END OF BID FORM – APPENDIX E

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00300 CARMACKS, YUKON BID FORM – APPENDIX F: CASH ALLOWANCES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

BID FORM – APPENDIX F: CASH ALLOWANCES


SUBMITTED BY:

1.1 CASH ALLOWANCES

We, the above named bidder, have provided the Cash Allowance(s) included in our bid price (as entered in the Stipulated Price Bid Form) as requested below. These prices do NOT include GST or any other Value Added Taxes.

DESCRIPTION AMOUNT ($)

1. a. Wood French Doors (with sandblasted images)

Toddler Dr #30 Infant Rm Dr # 33 Pre School #7 After School #8

b. Wood French Entry Doors - Dbl sandblasted image Activity Rm Drs #15 – metal frame not included – doors only

Based on BC Door types 1410 (single) / type 396 (double) Note: supply & install doors by contractor

$ 6,000.00

2. Carved Front Entry Columns: $ 5,500.00

3. Decorative Artwork/Logos in Lino Floor (laser cut images) 1x approx 5’ dia logos 10x 16” x 16”

$ 3,500.00

4. Dreamcatcher Artworks $3,000.00

5. Interior Office Signage $750.00

6. Carved Front Entry Sign $1,000.00

END OF BID FORM – APPENDIX E

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00300 CARMACKS, YUKON BID FORM – APPENDIX G: STATEMENT APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 00300 BID FORM – APPENDIX G: LOCAL LABOUR & SUPPLIER STATEMENT


SUBMITTED BY:

CONTRACTOR’S LOCAL LABOUR & SUPPLIERS COMMITMENT STATEMENT

A. State below the number of crew members you may be able to accommodate in construction indicating estimated days and where possible job category and projected hourly rates for same. Also indicate any suppliers that may be utilized.

DESCRIPTION DAYS

. :

SUPPLIER

END OF BID FORM – APPENDIX G

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00300 CARMACKS, YUKON BID FORM – APPENDIX H: Fax Bid Amend APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

BID FORM – APPENDIX H: FAXED BID AMENDMENT


TO (OWNER): FAX NUMBER: DATE: PROJECT: WE HEREBY AMEND OUR BID PRICE AS FOLLOWS: To Previously From Previously Submitted Bid Price Submitted Bid Price Add Subtract AMENDMENT TO BID PRICE (in figures) $ $ AMENDMENT TO BID PRICE (in writing) ADD / SUBTRACT: $ AMENDMENT TO TIME: We agree to attain Substantial Performance within weeks. Amend our Required Alternative, Itemized or Unit Prices to read as follows:

Note: These prices are completely new prices as per Clause 7.1.4 of the Instructions To Bidders. These changes in price or in time are not a subtraction from or addition to already submitted Alternative, Itemized or Unit Prices. These prices do NOT include Value Added Taxes. (Add to Bid Price) (Subtract from Bid Price) $ $ The amended change in time is: Add days; Subtract days. Other amendments including issued addendum numbers are (or reference and include by attachment): NAME OF BIDDER: ADDRESS: TELEPHONE: FAX: AUTHORIZED SIGNING OFFICER: Name and Title Signature

END OF BID FORM – APPENDIX H

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 00800 CARMACKS, YUKON SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

GENERAL CONDITIONS REFERENCE

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR STANDARD CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT CCDC 2 - STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT 2008.

GENERAL STATEMENT

Supplementary Conditions shall be read in conjunction with, and in case of conflict, take precedence over the General Conditions.

Where any of the General Conditions are supplemented or amended hereinafter, the unaffected provisions of such General Conditions shall remain in effect. Supplementary Conditions to any General Condition shall be considered as superseding the affected provision thereof.

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT

PART 2 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

GC 2.3 REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK

2.3.2 Add, in the first sentence “review,” before the word “tests”.

2.3.4 In the first sentence replace “special” with “review,” and add “review,” before the third instance of “inspections”.

Add:

2.3.8 Should the Consultant be required to make more than one review of rejected work or should the Consultant perform additional reviews due to failure of the Work to comply with the application for status of completion made be the Contractor, the Contractor is required to compensate the Owner for such additional Consultant services including expenses incurred. Adjustment for such

compensation should be made as outlined under PART 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK.

PART 3 - EXECUTION OF THE WORK

GC 3.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OF OTHER CONTRACTORS

Delete:

3.2.2.2 Delete this clause in its entirety.

Add:

3.2.3.4 as it applies to the applicable health and construction safety legislation at the Place of the Work the Contractor shall assume overall responsibility and be designated as the “Prime

Contractor.”


GC 3.6 SUPERVISION

3.6.1 Add after the last sentence:

“The appointed Contractor representative shall not be changed except for valid reason. The appointed Contractor representative shall not be changed without consultation with and with written acceptance of the Owner. This acceptance shall not be unreasonably

withheld.”

GC 3.7 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS

3.7.4 Add at the end of the sentence “, as outlined in GC 6.3 – CHANGE DIRECTIVE.”

PART 4 - ALLOWANCES

GC 4.1 CASH ALLOWANCES

4.1.2 Add, after the first sentence “unless noted otherwise, none of the work included in the drawings and specifications is intended to be paid to by the cash allowances. The cash allowances are for the Owner’s use, at the Owner’s sole discretion.”

PART 5 - PAYMENT

GC 5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT

5.2.4 Add, after the first sentence:

“A second schedule, stating the anticipated monthly progress payments, is to be submitted upon request.”

Add:

5.2.8 An application for payment shall be deemed received only if submitted complete with required supporting documentation as determined by the Consultant.


Add:

5.2.9 The Contractor shall with each and every application for payment subsequent to the first, submit a current CCDC 9A Statutory Declaration of Progress Payment Distribution by Contractor, which shall be completed and sworn before a Notary Public or a Commissioner for Oaths for the Province of British Columbia/Yukon Territory.

GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT

Add:

5.3.1.2 “If, after a certificate of payment has been issued to the Owner (and prior to payment by the Owner), the Consultant determines on the basis of new information that the amount certified for payment is inappropriately high or low relative to the value of the work performed, then the Consultant shall issue a revised certificate of payment,”

5.3.1.3 Delete in its entirety and replace with,

“The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor, on account, in the amount certified by the Consultant as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement – PAYMENT, on or before the later of:

- Twenty calendar days after receipt by the Consultant of the application of payment, or

- Twenty-eight calendar days after the last day of the payment period for which the Contractor’s application for payment is made.”

GC 5.4 SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK

Add:

5.4.4 Subject to the requirements of the Builders Lien Act relative to the date of issuance by the Consultant of the certificate of completion pursuant to paragraph 5.4.2:

.1 the Consultant shall issue to the Owner and copy to the Contractor a certificate of payment for an amount equal to the Contract Price less:

.1 twice the value of any deficiencies shown on the comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected as in GC 5.4.1, as determined by the Consultant;

.2 the value of incomplete work as determined by the Consultant; and

.3 the amounts of all previous certificates of payment.

.4 the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor in accordance with the

provisions of GC 5.3.1.3


Add:

5.4.5 The Owner reserves the right to take possession of and use completed or partially completed portion of the Work, in addition to occupancy conditions included in the

Contract, providing:

.1 the portion of the Work is ready to be used for the purpose intended, to the satisfaction of the Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction; and

.2 the Owner’s possession and use do not interfere with the Contractor’s Work; and

.3 the Consultant conducts a review prior to possession by the Owner; and

.4 any extra costs are borne by the Owner, subject to the provisions of GC 6.5

Delays.

Add:

5.4.6 An application for Substantial Performance of the Work shall be deemed complete only if submitted with required supporting documentation, including those requirements in GC 5.3.8, as determined by the Consultant.

GC 5.5 PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK

Add:

5.5.1.3 When applying for release of holdback, the Contractor shall submit a current CCDC 9B Statutory Declaration of Progress Payment Distribution by Subcontractor from each of the Subcontractors and a Worker’s Compensation Board Letter of Good Standing.

If deemed applicable, a certificate from the Land Registry Office, on the date of expiration of the Lien Period, that no liens have been registered against the property. Refer to section below.

As per section 89 of The Indian Act, R.S.C. 1985, c.I-5 (with amendments), the real and personal property of an Indian or a Band situated on a reserve is not subject to charge, pledge, mortgage, attachment, levy, seizure, distress or execution in favor or at the instance of any person other than an Indian or Band. Contractor to take this under advisement, confirm if lien rights apply and make appropriate arrangements with subcontractors.


Add:

HOLDBACK TRUST ACCOUNT PROTOCOL

Savings Institution:

Name:

Location:

Particulars of the Account:

Joint account in the name of Owner and Contractor.

Identified as a trust account.

Interest bearing savings account. Interest accrues to the benefit of the Owner until holdback (or any portion) is due and thereafter to the benefit of the Contractor.

No Automatic Teller Machine access;

No withdrawal without two signatures, one from each of the Owner and Contractor.

Authorized Signatories:

For the Owner:

Name:

Position with the Company:

Signature:

For the Contractor:

Name:

Position with the Company:

Signature:

Copies of monthly statements to be mailed by the savings institution to both the Contractor and the Owner.

The Owner shall provide to the Contractor proof of deposit of the holdback each month, immediately following each such deposit. Contractor is at liberty to provide copies of proof of deposit to subcontractors and suppliers if requested.

The Owner shall make payment of the final payment of holdback into the Holdback Trust Account at least 10 days prior to the expiry of the period for filing liens stipulated in the Builders Lien Act or earlier if due under the Contract


GC 5.6 PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK

Add:

5.6.4 An application for progressive release of holdback will not be considered complete until all related documentation required for the Consultant’s review is received, including those

requirements in GC 5.2.8

GC 5.7 FINAL PAYMENT

Delete:

5.7.4 “no later than 5 calendar days after the issuance of a final certificate for payment,”

Add:

5.7.5 Partial payment may not be made for the completion or correction of any deficiencies shown on the comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to the date of the issuance of the final certificate of payment.

PART 6 – CHANGES IN THE WORK

GC 6.2 CHANGE ORDER

Add:

6.2.3 The following shall determine Contractor markup on Change Orders by percentage:

.1 To the cost of the Work performed by the Contractor directly, the Contractor may

add a maximum of 20% markup for overhead and profit combined.

.2 To the cost of the Work performed by Subcontractors for the Contractor, before the Subcontractor’s markup, the Contractor may add a maximum of 10% markup

for overhead and profit combined.

.3 On Work deleted from the Contract, not covered by unit prices, the credit to the Owner shall be the cost of the Work as set out in GC 6.3 – CHANGE

DIRECTIVE, article 6.3.7.

.4 For a detailed list of what the Contractor may include in the cost of the Work

before adding markups, refer to GC 6.3 CHANGE DIRECTIVE, article 6.3.7.

GC 6.5 DELAYS

Add:

6.5.3.3 Add the word “local” after the word “adverse”.


Add:

6.5.6 The party making the claim shall submit to the Consultant, within 10 Working Days, a detailed account of the Contract Time extension claimed and the grounds upon which the claim is based complete with required supporting documentation as determined by the Consultant.

Add:

6.5.7 Should the Consultant, in consultation with the Contractor, determine the Contractor is delayed in performance of the Work, or any part thereof, by the Contractor’s inaction, or by delay or inaction of anyone employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, and the Contract Time is compromised:

.1 Then the Contractor shall accelerate the Work as required to meet the Contract Time.

.2 The Contractor will promptly give Notice in Writing of such determination to the Owner and the Contractor.

.3 The Contractor shall then promptly give the Owner and the Consultant Notice in Writing of specific changes to the construction scheduling and construction processes the Contractor will implement to accelerate the Work.

.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to payment for costs to accelerate the Work to meet the Contract Time.

GC 6.6 CLAIMS FOR A CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE

Add:

6.6.1 Add “in no case more than 10 Working Days from the event or series of events giving rise

to the claim.”

PART 7 – DEFAULT NOTICE

GC 7.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK, OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT

7.1.5 In the first sentence, after “paragraph 7.1.1, replace “and” with “or”.

PART 10 – GOVERNING REGULATIONS

GC 10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES

Add:

10.2.8 The Contractor shall provide to the Consultant copies of all inspection reports from the various authorities having jurisdiction within 2 Working Days of their receipt.


GC 10.4 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION

Add:

10.4.3 The Contractor is formally designated as the “Prime Contractor.”

PART 11 – INSURANCE AND CONTRACT SECURITY

GC 11.2 CONTRACT SECURITY

Add:

11.2.3 The Contractor shall give the Owner Notice in Writing of any material change in the

surety within 15 days of occurrence.

PART 12 - INDEMNIFICATION, WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND WARRANTY

GC 12.3 WARRANTY

Add:

12.3.4 Add, “In effecting a correction of defects or deficiencies, the Contractor shall also bear all costs involved in removing, replacing, repairing, or restoring aspects of the Work that may be affected in the process of making the correction.”

Add:

12.3.7 Where a material, product or installation covered by warranty fails, the stipulated warranty and warranty period shall be renewed for the specific Work being replaced or repaired, with the exception of warranties referred to in GC 12.3.6.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01010 CARMACKS, YUKON SUMMARY OF WORK APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 LOCATION OF WORK

A. Carmacks, Yukon.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Site: Refer to drawings.

B. Notify all trades of the provisions of the Contract Documents.

C. Should historical artifacts or remains be discovered during execution of the work stop work in the immediate area and immediately notify the Owner and the Consultant. Do not move, relocate or disturb in any way.

D. The Work of this contract shall include the furnishing of all labour, materials, plant equipment and services necessary for the execution and completion of Dunema Zra Sanch’i Ku Daycare Centre, Carmacks, Yukon, and related site work as indicated and specified.

E. The Work consists of a one storey daycare building of approximately 5,213 sf (484 m2). The

development includes: Toddler, infant, preschool and after school rooms, an active play area, a servery, dining/activity area, coordinator’s office, staff room, child bathrooms, mechanical room, electrical room, storage areas, laundry and adjacent site works, including sidewalks, patio areas, play yard, access drive and parking lot.

F. Dunema Zra Sanch’i Ku Daycare Centre building consists of concrete footings, concrete slab, some heavy timber (log & beams) framing, wood trusses, wood stud exterior and interior walls, wood siding, standing seam metal roof, and vinyl frame windows, adjacent site work (sidewalks, patio area and site grading).

G. In addition, LSCFN Daycare project includes some site works (noted as a separate price) - gravel entry road, parking lot, street lighting and any other services as noted.

H. The intent is that an associated Services Garage (part of Tender A) will be tendered separately in conjunction with the Health & Social Building project. The Services Garage will include :

1. Boiler for Daycare 2. Emergency generator 3. Fire protection services – tank and pump 4. Utility services

The above is not included in this tender, but is included with the Health & Social Building (Tender A). However, all tie ins (piping, electrical) from daycare to this facility as noted on drawings are included.

I. It is the Owner’s intention to have the project to lock up by November 15, 2010. Interior finishes, and related fire and life safety components be completed by December 15, 2011. Final exterior work on the building will conclude as weather permits, and substantial completion will be coordinated and in conjunction with the completion of the Services Garage.

J. It is the Owner’s objective to have all elements of the LSCFN Daycare Centre project completed by the end of December 2011.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01220

CARMACKS, YUKON GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 01220

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 – General

Requirements are deemed to be part of each section. Read the above named documents

in conjunction with the Specifications.

B. Streets, Walkways and Entrances: Keep streets, walkways and entrances serving

adjoining premises clear. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and

equipment on site.

C. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install

equipment in completed Project areas prior to Substantial Completion, provided such

occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and

partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1.2 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE

A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, the subject of imperative statements is the

Contractor.

B. Streamlined language is used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the

imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text,

subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled

indirectly by the Owner or by others when so noted.

C. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

D. “Provide”: Means furnish and install, complete with necessary components and

accessories, ready for intended use.

E. “Indicated”: Is a reference to other portions of the Contract Documents.



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

F. “Approved”: Except where specifically stated otherwise, the words “approved”, “directed”,

“requested”, “selected”, “accepted”, mean “approved by the Owner or Architect”, “directed

by the Owner or Architect” and so on. The words “approved” and “accepted” shall be held

to the limitations stated in the General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case shall

“approval” or “acceptance” by the Owner be interpreted as a release of Contractor of their

responsibilities to fulfill all of the requirements of the Contract Documents.

G. “Observe, Observation”: Except as otherwise defined, the Architect’s observation of the

Work will be held to the limitations stated in the General and Supplementary Conditions

and the Owner/ Architect Agreement. In no case shall observation by the Owner or

Architect be interpreted as a release of Contractor of their responsibilities to fulfill all of the

requirements of the Contract Documents.

H. “Furnish”: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, furnish means supply, including

shop fabrication if applicable, and delivery to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,

assembly, installation and similar operations as applicable in each instance.

I. “Install”: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, install means operations at project

site including but not limited to, unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing,

anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, placing in

service and similar operations as applicable in each instance.

J. “Installer”: The person or firm engaged by Contractor for performance of a specific unit of

installation work at the project site. It is a general requirement that Installers be expert and

experienced in the work they are engaged to perform.

1.3 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Substitutions of items for products specified or shown will not be permitted unless approved

in writing in advance by the Owner.

B. Submit within 15 days of notice to proceed. Subsequent substitutions will be considered

only for the following reasons. Indicate with request one or more reasons why substitution

is required.

1. Unavailability: Specified item has been discontinued or is unavailable in time to meet

Construction Schedule through no fault of Contractor or subcontractor.



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 3

2. Unsuitability: Subsequent information discloses specified item is unsuitable,

inappropriate, unable to perform properly, or fit designated space.

3. Regulatory Requirements: Substitution is required to comply with Code interpretations or

insurance regulations.

4. Warranty: Manufacturer or fabricator declare specified item to be unsuitable for use

intended or refuses to certify or warrant performance of specified item for Project.

5. Items were bid and contracted before specifications were finalized, or incorporated into

Owner – Contractor agreement.

6. For economic reasons, and with approval of Owner and Architect, where it does not

affect quality of finished work.

C. During Construction Period, Contractor will be notified by Architect in writing of Architect’s

decision to accept or reject Substitution Request.

1. Submit two copies of Substitution Request. Limit each request to one Substitution

Request form.

2. Burden of proof is upon Substitution Request, as proposed, to show compliance with

specified requirements. Submit drawings, product data, samples, certified test results,

and as needed to fully describe Substitution request for evaluation by Owner and

Architect.

3. Where product data includes other than that proposed by substitution Request, clearly

mark, or otherwise indicate, exact substitution.

4. Document each Substitution Request with complete data substantiating that proposed

substitution complies with provisions of Contract Documents.

D. Submission of Substitution Request constitutes representation that Bidder or Contractor:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds, in all

respects, specified product.

2. Shall provide the same or better warranty for substitution as for specified product.

3. Shall be responsible for effect of substitution upon related Work, shall coordinate

installation, and be responsible for other changes which may be required for Work to be

complete in all respects, in compliance with design intent and in compliance with



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 4

applicable codes and regulatory requirements.

4. Shall be responsible for additional costs, which may subsequently become apparent.

This includes additional costs for required additional Architect's services made necessary

by the substitution.

5. Shall provide cost savings to Contract Sum as credits.

6. Shall provide specified product, material, or system at no change in Contract Sum should

substitution be rejected.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Administrative Requirements:

1. Coordinate construction to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the

Work. Coordinate operations that depend on each other for proper installation,

connection, and operation.

2. Carefully study and compare Contract Documents before proceeding with fabrication and

installation of work. Promptly advise Owner of errors, inconsistencies, omissions, or

apparent discrepancies discovered.

3. Requests For Information (RFI): Allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with

Architect and Owner. Where possible allow two weeks for Architect/Owner review and

routing of submittals and RFI’s. Submit to Architect, on Contractor’s standard form, in

sequentially numbered requests in typewritten or e-mail form.

4. Coordinate actual layout of plumbing, fire protection, HVAC, electrical and other similar

elements as necessary to avoid interference between systems.

5. Maintain configurations of architectural elements and minimum ceiling and clearance

heights as required by code and Contract Documents.

6. Prepare coordination drawings if needed for installation of products and materials

fabricated by separate entities especially where limited space necessitates maximum

utilization of space for efficient installation of different components.

1.5 OWNER SUPPLIED MATERIALS

A. Scheduling delivery of Owner-supplied items required to maintain the construction

schedule.



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 5

1. Check materials as they are delivered and to notify the Owner immediately through the

Consultant of Owner-supplied materials not meeting specified standards or received in

damaged condition.

1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Refer to Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.

1.7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. This project is intended to conform to the National Building Code 2005 Yukon edition.

Comply with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. At least one week prior to operations in the vicinity of a utility, notify the Authorities having

jurisdiction and the Owner and obtain approval for access to operations carried out on

public or private property.

C. Submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, notices,

judgments, and communications from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. The owner will apply for and pay for the Building Permit. The contract to apply for, obtain

and pay for all specialty permits (electrical, mechanical, plumbing etc), other than Building

Permit required to perform the Work.

E. Referenced standards are part of the Contract Documents and have the same force and

effect as if bound with these specifications.

F. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, comply with the latest standard in effect as

of the date of the Owner/Contractor Agreement, unless an earlier standard is recognized by

the authorities having jurisdiction and if permitted by Owner.

G. Obtain copies of industry standards directly from publisher.

H. The titles of industry standard organizations are commonly abbreviated; full titles may be

found in Encyclopedia of Associations or ask Consultant.

I. In the absence of other standards being required by the Contract Documents, work is to

conform to, or exceed the minimum standards of the Canadian Government Specifications

Board, the Canadian Standards Association, the National Building Code, The Workers'

Compensation Board of British Columbia & Yukon Territory and manufacturers of material



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 6

supplied for this project, whichever is/are applicable.

J. Wherever standards are referred to in the specifications, the latest edition of the standard

shall apply at time of Tender.

K. Where conflicts arise between one document or authority and another, the more stringent

regulation shall apply.

L. Weather Conditions

All sections of work shall include in their tender an allowance sufficient to cover full,

continuous working operation through normal winter weather conditions, without

interruptions or shutdowns.

1.8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Arrange for, provide and maintain temporary facilities and controls as required for the

proper and expeditious prosecution of the Work. Provide temporary enclosures to secure

the Work.

B. Provide one job site telephone line and one fax line for the duration of the project if a

connection is available per client.

C. Provide clean, orderly, secure storage sheds for temporary equipment and tool storage.

D. Provide and maintain clean lockable sheds for storage of materials.

E. Provide and maintain sufficient sanitary facilities in accordance with requirements of local

health authorities.

1. Provide temporary power and light to the site in accordance with local codes and by-laws.

The Contractor shall disconnect and remove service when no longer required.

Provide an adequate number of power centers in each area of the building.

Install lamps in suitable locations to obtain unobstructed light over the entire area.

The permanent power and lighting system of the building, or portions thereof may be

used when it is available, subject to approval of the Consultant. Be responsible for all

damages thereto. Pay for all costs of maintaining and providing temporary power and

light when using permanent system.

Upon completion of work, for which the permanent lighting system can be used, replace

all lamps and leave the entire system in near original condition as possible.



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 7

F. Provide temporary heating to the site in accordance with local codes and by-laws.

The Contractor shall supply and install temporary heating equipment sufficient to maintain

temperature as required by various subcontractors in the execution of their work.

Disconnect and remove equipment when no longer required.

G. Provide temporary barriers and maintain in safe condition throughout the Work.

Protection

Provide temporary enclosures for securing off of work and the maintenance of any services

necessary to the proper and efficient operation of the project.

Conduct construction operations with minimum interference to adjacent buildings, adjacent

public or private roadways, parking lots, sidewalks and access facilities in general. Keep

such areas free of material debris and equipment at all times

Provide temporary protection required to adequately protect the adjoining properties, the

public, and construction personnel.

H. Securely close exterior openings after working hours with solid hoarding using minimum 2 x

4 studs at 24 inches on centre sheathed with ¾ inch plywood. Weather-strip openings to

prevent moisture from entering building once roof is installed.

I. Provide, within office space, adequate first aid facilities as required by regulatory authority

having jurisdiction.

J. Maintain and provide digital photo records of project – via emailing digital photos to

Consultant.

K. Contractor to confirm with Owner if they can provide a trailer for site meetings

L. Temporary Housing: Contractor to confirm with Owner about permission for temporary

housing on the site.

1. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining temporary water which can be

purchased/arranged through the Owner.

1.9 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Products include material, equipment and systems.



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 8

B. Products shall conform to the most current standard specified in each section. Where

contradiction exists between standards, the most stringent requirements shall apply.

C. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, products incorporated into the Work shall be new,

and of the most suitable grade of their respected kinds for the intended use.

D. Delivery Storage and Handling:

1. Transport products by methods to avoid product damage.

2. Deliver and store products in manufacturer’s original containers or packaging, with

identifying labels intact and legible.

3. Furnish equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or

damage.

4. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities

are correct, and products are undamaged.

5. Immediately replace non-conforming products with new conforming products, at no

additional cost to the Owner.

6. Store products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

7. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures. Maintain within temperature and

humidity ranges required by manufacturer’s instructions and as required to prevent

damage.

8. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in well-drained area and prevent mixing

with foreign matter.

E. General Installation Requirements:

1. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, install products in accordance with product

manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Obtain and distribute copies of manufacturer’s instructions to parties involved in the

installation, including 2 copies to Architect.

3. Install products plumb, level and true unless indicated otherwise.

4. Protect adjacent surfaces from installation of work, replace existing work damaged during

installation at no additional cost to the Owner.



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 9

5. Remove visible labels, trademarks, or stickers in finished Work unless specifically

required by mechanical, electrical, or Code requirements.

1.10 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

A. Examination:

1. Inspect existing conditions, and substrates, including elements subject to damage or

movement during cutting and patching, prior to each phase of the work.

2. Inspect conditions affecting the performance of the Work. Correct unsatisfactory

conditions prior to the start of each new element of work.

3. Fabrication of materials or start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Preparation:

1. Prepare completely for the Work of the Section, including review of shop drawings,

preparation of substrates, and required testing. Conduct pre-installation conference

where specified.

2. Protection: Protect adjacent surfaces from work in progress. Mark or hoard off as

required.

C. Execution:

1. Maintain the premises and the job site in a neat and orderly condition, free from

accumulations of waste materials and rubbish during the entire construction period.

Remove crates, cartons and other flammable waste materials or trash from the Work

areas each working day.

2. Care shall be taken by workers not to mark, soil or otherwise deface finished surfaces. In

the event that finished surfaces become defaced, clean and restore such surfaces to their

original condition.

3. Clean up immediately upon completion of each trade's work.

4. Upon completion of the Work, remove surplus materials and rubbish of every kind from

the site.

D. Cleaning, Protecting and Adjusting:

1. During Construction:



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 10

a. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the Work the site and adjacent properties free

from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and wind blown debris, resulting

from construction operations.

b. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish.

Remove and dump as required to maintain orderly, neat site. Do not allow overflow

of debris onto adjacent sites under any condition.

2. Take necessary precautions to prevent dust from rising. Protect mattered portions of the

existing building affected by the operations under this Section by dust-proof partitions by

other adequate means.

3. Immediately clean dust and debris related to deliveries or construction.

4. Do not close or obstruct sidewalks, streets or lanes without prior Owner approval. Do not

store or place materials on public property. Conduct operations with minimum traffic

interference.

5. Execute the Work in a careful and orderly manner, with the least possible disturbance to

the public and neighbouring properties.

E. Cutting and Patching:

1. When alterations occur, cut, remove, patch, repair or refinish the adjacent surfaces and

leave in as good a condition as existed prior to the commencing of the Work.

2. Materials and workmanship employed in the alternations, unless otherwise shown or

specified, shall comply with that of the original work. Alteration work shall be performed

by the various respective trades that normally perform the particular items of work.

3. Finish new and adjacent existing surfaces as specified for new work. Clean existing

surfaces of dirt, grease and loose paint before refinishing.

F. Provide temporary protection required to adequately protect the adjoining property, the

public and construction personnel.

G. Provide temporary weather protection for portions of the Work that become exposed to

weather. Be responsible for damage caused by insufficient protection.

1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain a complete set of record documents which clearly and neatly indicate changes



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 11

from the Contract Documents, and uncovered existing conditions, which will be

subsequently concealed.

1. Contract drawings.

2. Specifications.

3. Reviewed Shop drawings, product data and samples.

B. Do not use Record documents for other purposes. Store separate from those used for

construction. Keep documents current. Do not permanently conceal work until required

information has been recorded.

C. Mark specifications legibly and record at each Product section a description of actual

products installed. Include manufacturer’s name and product model and number.

Drawings shall indicate diagrammatic location of HVAC, concealed roof drains, pipes,

feeder stacks, cleanouts and shutoff valves and all underground piping and other

installation.

D. At Contract Closeout, submit documents with transmittal letter containing date, project title,

Contractor’s name and address, list of documents and signature of Contractor.

E. Provide immediate access to project documents upon written request by Owner.

1.12 TRADEMARKS AND LABELS

A. Trademarks and labels, including applied labels shall not be visible in the finished work.

Trademarks on appliances may be left in place. Remove trademarks or labels by grinding

if necessary, or painted out where the particular materials is being painted. Exceptions:

identification of mechanical and electrical equipment, fire rated doors and hatches.

1.13 WARRANTY REVIEW

A. Eleven months from the date of Substantial Performance the Contractor will coordinate a

one (1) year warranty inspection to be held before the twelve month period is up. The

Contractor, Owner and Consultants will attend. All deficient items noted shall be corrected

under the guarantee.



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 12

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

SUBMITTED TO: __________________________________________

SPECIFIED ITEM: __________________________

SECTION NO. PARAGRAPH NO. DESCRIPTION OF SPECIFIED ITEM

The undersigned requests consideration for following substitution to that specified.

PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:

What is the projected lump sum installed cost difference between proposed substitution and least expensive specified item.

Increase/Decrease $

ATTACHED DATA

Include product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance, and test data as necessary for

evaluation. Clearly identify proposed substitution and portions of data from other items where more than one item is

described. Include description of changes to Contract Documents required by proposed substitution.

CERTIFICATION

Undersigned certifies that following paragraphs are correct, except as modified by attachments:

A. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings.

B. Undersigned will pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction

costs, caused by requested substitution.

C. Proposed substitution request clearly states adverse affects on other trades, Construction Schedule, or

specified warranty requirements.

D. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for proposed substitution.

Undersigned further states that function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified

item.

SUBMITTED BY: FOR USE BY ARCHITECT

Signature Reviewed ______ Reviewed as noted

Firm Not Approved Received too late

Address Not Approved – inadequate information

By

Date Date

Telephone (____) Remarks

Fax (____)

LIST ATTACHMENTS

Approved for Architect’s Review: Accepted Not Accepted Accepted as Noted

(Contractor’s Signature) By: (Owner/Architect’s Signature)

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01330 CARMACKS, YUKON SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Coordinate submittal preparation with construction, fabrication, other submittals, and activities that require sequential operations. Transmit in advance of construction operations to avoid delay.

B. Review product data, shop drawings, and samples prior to submission to Consultant for review.

C. Until submission is reviewed, work involving relevant product may not proceed.

D. The Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions is not relieved by the Consultant's review of submittals.

1.2 GENERAL

A. Include the names, addresses and telephone numbers of the Contractor and Sub-Contractors associated with each submittal.

B. Submittals to include the Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying review of submission, verification of field measurements and compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. Processing: Allow two (2) weeks for initial review. Allow more time if the Consultant must delay processing to permit coordination. Allow one (1) week for reprocessing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Where product data is required submit two (2) copies. Compile and submit product data, including installation instructions, maintenance instruction, and maintenance manuals for products furnished under the Contract. Refer to section 01770 Closeout procedures for documents into Maintenance Manuals for Owner’s use.

B. Shop Drawings: Where shop drawings are required by the contract documents, submit 2 copies of drawings. Refer to section 01770 Closeout procedures for documents into Maintenance Manuals for Owner’s use.

C. Samples: Where samples are required by the contract documents submit 2 samples of each material.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01315 CARMACKS, YUKON PROJECT MEETINGS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 01315 PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Pre-construction conferences. 2. Pre-installation conferences. 3. Progress meetings.

1.2 GENERAL MEETING REQUIREMENTS

A. Make physical arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda well in advance (to accommodate travel arrangements) before the meeting and submit to Owner and Consultant, with copies for participants.

B. Take meeting minutes, and distribute copies within two (2) days, to the Owner, Consultant and attendees. Distribute copies to other parties as appropriate.

C. Representatives attending meetings shall be authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.

D. Consultant will periodically attend meetings to ascertain the Work is expedited and is consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules.

1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. As necessary, Owner will schedule a pre-construction conference before starting construction. Responsibilities and personnel assignments will be reviewed. See each division for pre-installation conferences required for that aspect of the Work.

B. Attendees:

1. As necessary, authorized representatives of Owner, Consultant and Owner’s Consultants; major subcontractors; and other concerned parties shall attend.

2. Subcontractor participants shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

C. Agenda: Discuss items that could affect progress, including the following:

1. Tentative construction schedule. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 4. Use of the premises, site mobilization and review of Owner Contractor responsibilities

and administrative procedures. 5. Construction Safety Plan and Fire Safety Plan: Contractor shall submit a Construction

Safety Plan and Fire Safety Plan for Owner’s review and approval. Submit to authority having jurisdiction upon request.

1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. As necessary conduct a conference before each activity that requires coordination with other operations. If requested by Contractor, Subcontractors are required to attend conferences.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01315 CARMACKS, YUKON PROJECT MEETINGS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

Unless otherwise required, notify Consultant a minimum of seven (7) calendar days prior to each scheduled meeting.

B. Attendees:

1. The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation shall attend. As necessary the Owner will advise Consultant of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Review the progress of other operations and preparations for the activity under consideration at each pre-installation conference, including requirements for the following:

a. Compatibility problems and acceptability of substrates. b. Time schedules and deliveries. c. Manufacturer's recommendations. d. Warranty requirements. e. Inspecting and testing requirements.

3. Contractor will record significant discussions and distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Consultant.

4. Subcontractor is not to proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Subcontractor is responsible for initiating actions necessary to resolve problems and reconvene the conference.

1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Progress meetings will be conducted at the Project Site at regular intervals as agreed to by Owner and Consultant.

B. Attendees:

1. The Owner, Consultant, and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or future activities shall be represented. Participants shall be authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

C. Agenda:

1. Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous meeting. Review items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion appropriate to Project status.

2. Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Construction Schedule. Determine how to expedite construction behind schedule; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss revisions required to insure subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

3. Provide Request For Information (RFI) log and discuss status of RFI’s. 4. Provide change proposal log and discuss status of proposed changes. 5. Provide submittal log and discuss status of submittals. 6. Reporting: Meeting minutes will be distributed to each party present and to parties who

should have been present. 7. Construction Schedule: At project start-up present Construction Schedule necessary

after each meeting where revisions have been made and distribute. Update Construction Schedule when in Consultant’s opinion significant change has occurred.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01440 CARMACKS, YUKON INDOOR AIR QUALITY APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 01440 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) goals and includes administrative and procedural requirements for the development and execution of a construction indoor air quality management plan.

B. IAQ Management Goals:

1. The Owner has established that this Project shall prevent indoor air quality problems resulting from the construction process, to sustain long term installer and occupant health and comfort.

2. Protect the ventilation system components during construction and clean contaminated components after construction is complete.

3. Control sources of potential IAQ pollutants at their source, by controlling selection of materials and processes used in Project construction.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. 01350 Special Project Procedures.

B. 01505 Construction Waste Management.

C. Division 15 Mechanical.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE Standard 52.2– 1999 Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction IAQ: Indoor Air Quality during the construction and pre-occupancy phases of the Project.

B. Project Construction IAQ Management Plan: A plan developed by the Owner and implemented by the Contactor to maintain high indoor air quality standards for the construction and pre-occupancy phases of the project.

C. Contractor Construction IAQ Plan: A plan developed by the Contractor describing how the Work will comply with the Project Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide product data for filtration media used during construction and installed immediately prior to occupancy with Minimum Efficiency Reporting Values (MERV) highlighted.

C. Photographs: Documenting construction IAQ management measures implemented during construction such as duct protection measures and measures to protect on-site stored or installed absorptive materials from moisture.

D. Draft Contractor Construction IAQ Management Plan: To be reviewed at the Draft C.C. IAQ Management Plan Review Meeting, outlined below.


1.6 CONTRACTOR CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. An Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan for the construction and pre-occupancy phases of the building to:

1. To protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials from contamination.

2. To meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction 1995, Chapter 3.

B. The SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction provides an overview of air pollution associated with construction, control measures, construction process management, quality control, communicating with occupants, and case studies. These guidelines can be accessed at www.smacna.org. Chapter 3 of the SMACNA Guidelines recommends Control Measures in five areas: HVAC Protection, Source Control, Pathway Interruption, Housekeeping, and Scheduling. Review the applicability of each Control Measure and include those that apply in the Draft IAQ Management Plan.

1. HVAC Protection: Shut down the return side of the HVAC system whenever possible during heavy construction. If the system must remain operational during construction include the following strategies that apply:

a. Fit the return side of the HVAC system with temporary filters.

b. Isolate the return side of the HVAC system from the surrounding environment as much as possible (e.g., place all tiles for the ceiling plenum, repair all ducts and air handler leaks).

c. Damper off the return system in the heaviest work areas and seal the return system openings with plastic.

d. Upgrade the filter efficiency where major loading is expected to affect operating HVAC system.

e. Clean permanent return air ductwork per National Air Duct Cleaning Association standards upon completion of all construction and finish installation work.

f. Install new clean media just prior to substantial completion and occupancy that has a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 13 as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999.

2. Source Control: Perform work in such a way as to minimize generation of contaminants at their source.

3. Pathway Interruption: Prevent contamination of clean spaces. Include the following strategies that apply:

a. Use 100% outside air ventilation (when outside temperatures are between 13 degrees C and 29 degrees C and humidity is between 30% and 60%) with air exhausted directly to the outside during installation of finishes and other VOC emitting materials.

b. Erect temporary barrier between work areas or between the inside and outside of the building to prevent unwanted airflow from dirty to clean areas.

4. Housekeeping: Reduce construction contamination in the building prior to occupancy through HVAC and regular space cleaning activities.

a. Store building materials in a weather tight, clean area prior to unpacking for installation.

b. Check for possible damage to building materials from high humidity.


c. Clean all coils, air filters, and fans before testing and balancing procedures are performed.

5. Scheduling: Specify construction sequencing to reduce absorption of VOC’s by materials that act as sinks or contaminant sources. Complete application of wet and odor-emitting materials such as paints, sealants, and coatings before installing sink materials such as ceiling tiles, carpets, insulation, gypsum products, and fabric-covered furnishings are installed.

a. Protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials from exposure to moisture through precipitation, plumbing leaks, or condensation from the HVAC system to prevent microbial contamination.

b. Conduct a two (2) week building flush-out with new filtration media at 100% outside air after construction ends and prior to occupancy. Filtration media shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 13 as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999. Replace filtration media used during flush-out prior to occupancy.

1.7 MEETING REQUIREMENTS

A. IAQ Management Plan Review Meeting: Once the Owner and Consultant have reviewed the Draft IAQ Management Plan and prior to construction at the site, schedule and conduct a meeting to review the Draft IAQ Management Plan and discuss procedures, schedules and specific requirements for IAQ during the construction and pre-construction phases of the building. Discuss coordination and interface between the Contractor and other construction activities. Identify and resolve problems with compliance to the requirements. Record minutes of the meeting, identify all conclusions reached and matters requiring further resolution.

1. Attendees: The Contractor and related Contractor personnel associated with the work of this section, including personnel to be in charge of the IAQ management program, Consultant, Owner and such additional personnel as the Consultant or Owner deem appropriate.

B. Final Contractor Construction IAQ Management Plan: Make any revisions to the Draft IAQ Management Plan agreed upon during the meeting identified above and incorporate resolutions agreed to be made subsequent to the meeting. Submit the revised plan to the Owner and Consultant for approval within 10 calendar days of the meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION OF IAQ MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. IAQ Manager (Owner): The Owner will designate an on-site party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers and overseeing the Project IAQ Management Plan.

B. IAQ Manager (Contractor): The Contractor will designate an on-site individual responsible for instructing workers and overseeing the Contractor Construction IAQ Management Plan.

C. Progress Meetings: Include construction related IAQ procedures in the pre-construction and construction progress meeting agendas.

D. Distribution: The Owner will distribute copies of the IAQ Management Plan to the Contractor, the Owner, and the Consultant.

E. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of the IAQ procedures and ensure that all participants in the construction process understand the importance of the goals of the IAQ Management Plan.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01505 CARMACKS, YUKON CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 01505 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. A goal of recycling at least 75% of construction waste by volume has been set for this project.

B. Submission and implementation of a Project Waste Management Plan. Implementation includes:

1. Disposal of waste materials for salvage, re-use, recycling and recovery.

2. Documenting flow of materials as a measure of compliance.

1.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS FOR THE PROJECT

A. The Owner has established that this Project shall generate the least amount of waste possible and that processes shall be employed that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible including prevention of damage due to mishandling, improper storage, contamination, inadequate protection or other factors as well as minimizing over-packaging and poor quantity estimating.

B. Of the inevitable waste that is generated, the waste materials designated in this Specification shall be salvaged for community reuse or recycling. Waste disposal in landfills or incinerators shall be minimized. For new construction, this means careful recycling of job site waste.

C. It is the goal of this project to divert 75% (by weight) of construction, deconstruction and land clearing debris from landfill disposal and to document this diversion.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Waste Management Plan.

C. Waste Inventory Disposal Documentation - Record

1.4 CODE OF PRACTICE

A. Refer also to “Job Site Recycling: A Guide for Builders and Developers” and “Demolition & Salvage: A Guide for Developers and Renovators.”

B. Reference Documents are available from the GVRD, Policy and Planning Department, T: 604-437-4873. Website address: www.gvrd.bc.ca/services/garbage/jobsite/index.html.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable codes and regulations for disposal and removal of common and hazardous waste.

B. Handle and dispose of hazardous and banned materials in accordance with the BC Waste Management Act and Special Waste Regulation, and per Yukon regional and municipal regulations. Hazardous and banned materials include but are not limited to asbestos, drywall, underground storage tanks, Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs), abandoned chemicals (gasoline, pesticides, herbicides, flammable and combustible substances), freon from cooling equipment, lead-based paints, smoke detectors, and mercury containing switches.

http://www.gvrd.bc.ca/services/garbage/jobsite/index.html

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01505 CARMACKS, YUKON CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. Waste Management Plan: Within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award of Contract, or prior to any waste removal, whichever occurs sooner, submit a Waste Management Plan to the Owner and Consultant. The Plan shall contain the following:

1. Analysis of Proposed Job Site Waste To Be Generated: Include the types of recyclable and waste materials generated (by volume or weight). Prepare a list of each item proposed to be salvaged during the course of the project. Refer to the “Job Site Recycling Guide” for a directory of service providers. This list is not necessarily complete. The Contractor may use these or other service providers.

2. Alternatives to Landfilling: Prepare a list of each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled during the course of the Project. Refer to the “Job Site Recycling Guide,” Directory section.

B. List of compulsory materials to be recycled, shall include, at minimum, the following materials:

1. Corrugated cardboard.

2. Packaging Materials.

3. Clean dimensional wood, palette wood.

4. Concrete/Brick/Concrete Block/Asphalt.

5. Scrap Metal.

6. Drywall.

7. Paint (return to Paint Depot).

C. Materials Handling Procedures: Prevent contamination of materials to be recycled and salvaged and handle materials consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities. Where space permits, source separation is recommended. Where materials must be co-mingled take to a processing facility for separation off-site.

D. Site Storage: Remove materials that are to be salvaged and reused from the site to an approved location designated by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01630 CARMACKS, YUKON PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 01630 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Related Section: Section 01631 Substitution Request Form.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Closed Proprietary Specifications: Products by one or more manufacturers are specified and specification Section does not allow for approval of other products by Substitution Request. No other product options will be accepted. Provide products and Work specified.

B. Open Proprietary Specifications: Products by one or more manufacturers are specified, and specification Section allows for approval of other products by Substitution Request. Submit Substitution Request for other products to Consultant under provisions of this Section.

1.3 SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS DURING BIDDING PERIOD

A. Submit Substitution Request to reach Consultant’s office before 5:00 PM at least five (5) working days prior to date for receiving Bids, and in conformance with Instructions to Bidders.

B. Bidders will be notified by Addendum of products approved in addition to those specified. No other form of approval, including verbal or implied, is acceptable to indicate approval of Substitution Request.

1.4 SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD

A. Substitution Requests, submitted by Contractor will not be considered, except for the following reasons. Indicate one or more reasons why substitution is required with Substitution Request.

1. Unavailability: Specified item has been discontinued or is unavailable in time to meet Construction Schedule through no fault of Contractor or subcontractor.

2. Unsuitability: Subsequent information discloses specified item is unsuitable, inappropriate, unable to perform properly, or fit designated space.

3. Increased Suitability: Contractor is aware of product that exceeds Owner’s goals regarding recycled content or post-consumer recycled content.

4. Regulatory Requirements: Substitution is required to comply with Code interpretations or insurance regulations.

5. Warranty: Manufacturer or fabricator declare specified item to be unsuitable for use intended or refuses to certify or warrant performance of specified item for Project.

B. During Construction Period, Contractor will be notified in writing of Consultant’s decision to accept or reject Substitution Request.

1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Submit two (2) copies of Substitution Request. Limit each request to one Substitution Request form.

B. Burden of proof is upon Substitution Request, as proposed, to show compliance with specified requirements. Submit drawings, product data, samples, certified test results, and as needed to fully describe Substitution request for evaluation by Consultant.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01630 CARMACKS, YUKON PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

C. Where product data includes other than that proposed by Substitution Request, clearly mark, or otherwise indicate, exact substitution.

D. Document each Substitution Request with complete data substantiating that proposed substitution complies with provisions of Contract Documents.

E. Submission of Substitution Request constitutes representation that Bidder or Contractor:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds, in all respects, specified product.

2. Shall provide the same or better warranty for substitution as for specified product.

3. Shall be responsible for effect of substitution upon related Work, shall coordinate installation, and shall be responsible for other changes which may be required for Work to be complete in all respects, in compliance with design intent and in compliance with all applicable codes and regulatory requirements.

4. Be responsible for additional costs which may subsequently become apparent. This includes additional costs for required additional Consultant's services made necessary by the substitution.

5. Shall provide all cost savings to Contract Sum as credits.

6. Shall provide specified product, material, or system should substitution be rejected, at no change in Contract Sum.

F. Substitutions indicated or implied on submittals, such as Shop Drawings, will not be accepted.

G. Products and materials included in the Work, not specified or approved by Substitution Request are defined as Non-Conforming Work. Remove and replace with conforming Work at Contractor's expense with no increase in Contract Time, as directed by Consultant.

1.6 OWNER WILL NOT CONSIDER

A. Substitution Requests that do not provide adequate or clearly defined information for complete and timely appraisal.

B. Substitutions that, if accepted, will require substantial revisions of Contract Documents.

C. Substitution indicated or implied by Shop Drawings and other submittals.

D. Substitutions not approved by published Addendum during Bid Period or not approved in writing by Consultant during Construction period.

E. Substitutions not submitted on completed Substitution Request Form.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01631 CARMACKS, YUKON SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 01631 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

SUBMITTED TO: ______________________________________________________________


SPECIFIED ITEM:

SECTION NO. PARAGRAPH NO. DESCRIPTION OF SPECIFIED ITEM

The undersigned requests consideration for following substitution to that specified.

PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:

What is the projected lump sum installed cost difference between proposed substitution and least

expensive specified item.

Increase/Decrease $

Increase/Decrease $

ATTACHED DATA:

Include product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance, and test data as necessary for evaluation. Clearly identify proposed substitution and portions of data from other items where more than one item is described. Include description of changes to Contract Documents required by proposed substitution.

CERTIFICATION:

The undersigned certifies the following paragraphs are correct, except as modified by attachments:

A. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings.

B. Undersigned will pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and

construction costs, caused by requested substitution.

C. Proposed substitution request clearly states adverse affects on other trades, Construction Schedule, or

specified warranty requirements.

D. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for proposed substitution.

Undersigned further states that function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent

or superior to specified item.

SUBMITTED BY: FOR USE BY ARCHITECT:

Signature Reviewed ______ Reviewed as noted

Firm Not Approved Received too late

Address Not Approved – inadequate information

By

Date Date

Telephone (____) Remarks

Fax (____)

LIST ATTACHMENTS

Approved for Architect’s Review: Accepted Not Accepted Accepted as Noted

(Contractor’s Signature) By: (Owner/Architect’s Signature)

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01720 CARMACKS, YUKON PROJECT RECORDS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 01300: Submittals - shop drawings, samples, manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 Project record documents, samples, specifications.

.2 Equipment and systems.

.3 Product data, materials and finishes, and related information.

.4. Operation and maintenance data.

.5 Warranties, guarantees.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance or operation of described products.

1.4 FORMAT

.1 Organize data in the form of an instructional manual.

.2 Binders: commercial quality, three ring size.

.3 When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

.1 Maintain at the job site, one record copy of each of the following:

.a Contract drawings.

.b Project manual.

.c Addenda.

.d Change orders.

.e Other modifications to Contract, including Field Instructions.

.f Field reports.

.g Reviewed shop drawings.

.h Test reports.

.i Copy of approved construction schedule.

.j Manufacturer's installation and application instructions.


.k Colour/Material schedule.

.l Building Code, Plumbing Code, Canadian Electrical Codes, together with all supplements.

.m Approved Building Permit drawings and Posting Card.

.n Reports from building authorities/inspectors.

.o Progress copies of As-Built Record Drawings, updated regularity as the Work progresses.

.2 Maintenance of Documents and Samples:

.a Store documents in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction.

.b Maintain documents in a clean, dry legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

.c Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Consultant.

.3 Recording Project Record Drawings:

.a Record information concurrently with construction progress. (Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded).

.b Drawings: legibly mark to record actual construction:

- all under slab piping and conduit to be accurately indicated on record drawings.

- depth of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.

- horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

- location of internal utilities and appurtenances, concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure.

- field changes of dimensions and details.

- changes made by Field Instruction or by Change Order.

- details not on original contract drawings.

.c Submittals: at the time of application for Substantial Performance deliver Record Documents to Consultant for subsequent delivery to the Owner. Substantial completion inspection will not be scheduled until as build records submitted.


1.6 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 General: compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation or products furnished under the Contract.

.a Prepare operation and maintenance data as specified in this section, and as referenced in other pertinent data as specified in this section, and as referenced in other pertinent sections of the specifications.

.b Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems.

.2 Quality Assurance: preparation of data and maintenance instructions shall be carried out by:

.a Personnel trained and experienced with knowledge in maintenance and operation of the described product.

.b Personnel completely familiar with the requirements of this section.

.3 Form of Submittals:

.a Prepare data in form of an Instructional Manual for use by the Owner's personnel.

.b Upon approval of initial copy by Consultant submit one additional copy in form prescribed, if requested by Consultant.

.4 Content of Manual:

.a Neatly typewritten table of contents arranged in a systematic order, where applicable following specification format.

.b Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.

.c Product Data: only those sheets pertinent to the specific product.

.d Drawings: do not use Project Record Drawings as maintenance drawings.

.e Adjusting Tools, Keys, Spare Parts: necessary adjusting tools, wrenches, brushes, keys, spares and the like as stipulated shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01770 CARMACKS, YUKON CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Final Cleaning.

B. Document submissions.

C. Substantial performance application.

D. Inspection and takeover procedure.

1.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ experienced cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface of unit to the condition expected in a normal, residential building cleaning and maintenance program. Complete the following operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion.

1. Site: Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Consultant, broom clean paved areas on the site and public paved areas adjacent to the site. Completely remove resultant debris.

2. Exterior: Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure.

3. Interior: Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter.

a. Remove all traces of splashed material from adjacent surfaces.

b. Remove paint droppings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces.

c. Glass: Clean inside and outside.

d. Polished surfaces: To surfaces requiring routine application of buffed polish, apply the polish recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished.

1.3 DOCUMENT SUBMISSIONS

A. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into sets of manageable size. Bind in individual, heavy-duty 3-ring binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following information:

1. Emergency instructions.

2. Spare parts list.

3. Copies of warranties.

4. Wiring diagrams.

5. Shop Drawings and Product Data.


B. Prior to application for Substantial Performance application submit the following:

1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

2. Submit copies of final inspection reports by authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, Building, Plumbing, Mechanical, and Electrical inspection reports.

3. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

1.4 SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE APPLICATION

A. Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Performance, complete the following:

1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the Work claimed as substantially complete.

2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Changeover locks and transmit keys to the Owner.

4. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel. Remove temporary facilities, mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

5. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touch-up painting.

6. Touch up and repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.

1.5 INSPECTION AND TAKEOVER PROCEDURES

A. On receipt of a request for inspection, the Consultant will proceed or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Consultant will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Performance following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

1. The Consultant will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially complete.

2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.

B. Final Acceptance: Before requesting inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following:

1. Final payment request with releases and supporting documentation. Include insurance certificates where required.

2. Submit a copy of the final inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion.


4. Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

1.6 REINSPECTION FEES

A. Should the Contractor require re-inspection of a partial list of deficiencies or should the Consultant be required to perform more than one re-inspection due to the failure of the Work to comply with the claims of status and completion made by the Contractor:

1. The Owner will compensate the Consultant for such additional services.

2. The Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01810 CARMACKS, YUKON COMMISSIONING APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 01810 COMMISSIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 COMMISSIONING OBJECTIVES

A. To bring mechanical, electrical, and other systems and components, from a state of static completion to a state of dynamic operation.

B. To verify conformance to Contract Requirements.

C. To confirm installations meet design intent of Specifications and function in accordance with defined operational requirements.

D. To ensure completed facility meets Owner’s stated requirements.

E. To provide testing documents, certification and records.

F. To fully train and equip Owner’s personnel to operate, maintain and trouble shoot operational building systems.

1.2 COMMISSIONING PLAN

A. Provide a commissioning plan consisting of the following:

1. Documentation defining design assumptions and performance standards of proposed systems.

2. Description of systems, intended operation and performance details.

3. Static testing and verification procedures.

4. Functional performance testing procedures.

5. Documentation requirements for test results.

6. Seasonal or deferred commissioning.

7. Training plan for building operators.

8. Preparation of the Interim and Final Commissioning Reports.

1.3 CONTENTS

A. Part One: describe the commissioning activities proposed.

B. Part Two: the descriptions of building mechanical and electrical systems as they appear in the Operations and Maintenance manual specified in Section 01770 Closeout Procedures.

C. Part Three: the testing procedures and documentation of test results.

D. Part Four: test procedures and documentation of seasonal commissioning.

1.4 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Commissioning Agent (CA) Responsibilities: Ensures commissioning activities are carried out in accordance with the Commissioning Plan.

1. Assembling the commissioning team and ensuring the coordination of activities with the team in carrying out the Commissioning Plan.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 01810 CARMACKS, YUKON COMMISSIONING APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

2. Chairing and arranging commissioning meetings.

3. Witnessing/Verifying testing and balancing measurements and procedures.

4. Witnessing all tests and initialing all test documents at the time of test.

5. Co-signing off all systems verification and test forms.

6. Coordinating the building operators training.

7. Arranging for the provision of additional training where required.

8. Receipt from the General Contractor and turnover of the completed Interim and Final Commissioning Reports.

B. Contractor Responsibilities:

1. Cooperate fully with the CA in execution of the Commissioning Plan. At completion of commissioning, provide a written statement affirming that building systems are operating properly in accordance with the design intent of the Contract Documents and Specifications.

2. Ensure necessary labour and materials are arranged in order to implement commissioning.

3. Video tape Commissioning Sessions and provide 2 copies of video tape to Owner at Project Closeout.

4. Prepare:

a. The Commissioning Plan and Commissioning Schedule.

b. Outline testing procedures and provide data recording formsSchematics and flow diagrams necessary for commissioning.

d. The Interim Commissioning Report containing required commissioning information except for work remaining to be done as seasonal or deferred commissioning work.

e. Schedule seasonal or deferred commissioning requirements.

f. The Final Commissioning Report. Provide three (3) copies to the CA.

5. Rectify Work and deficiencies identified during commissioning process to satisfaction of CA and Owner.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 02300 CARMACKS, YUKON EARTHWORK APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide excavation, rough and finish grading of new buildings and areas to be paved as required.

B. Provide imported granular and approved native fill materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil suitable for reuse in a location as directed by the Consultant.

D. Remove unsuitable soils, debris and surplus excavated material and dispose of in a legal manner.

E. Tree Retention: Tag and protect trees designated by Consultant for retention and reinstallation. Water the protected and stored trees during storage and after reinstallation.

F. Cleared trees (popular and spruce) to be cut in sections as designated by Consultant and stockpiled for recycle, firewood, and use for log parking barriers.

G. Provide separate price for sub-drainage at building perimeter including sump pits and accessories for a complete system as indicated.

H. Maintain distance from heritage pathway as directed by Consultant.

I. Retain rocks and boulders during excavation and locate as directed by Consultant for use in landscaping including for use in centre island turnabout.

J. Provide a separate price for perimeter sub-drainage system including sump pits as indicated.

K. Provide a separate price for main and secondary access roads and parking areas as indicated on drawings and specified.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Geotechnical Evaluation Foundation Recommendations prepared by EBA, June 19, 2009.


A. Division 15 Mechanical, sewage lines and service lines.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. Samples: Submit samples of drain tile, filter fabric and gravel proposed for use.


A. Examine the site and make every inquiry deemed necessary to determine the character of materials to be encountered, shall allow in Tender, the cost of excavation and filling to produce the stated finished rough grades and excavations for buildings and services as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Compaction of fills to Proctor Density standards.

C. General Materials testing to CSA and ASTM standards.


D. After excavation is complete, inform the Structural Engineer that excavation is ready for inspection. If required, test borings and other exploratory operations will be paid for by the Owner.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Arrange for a site visit together with Owner or Consultant, to examine existing site conditions. Take pictures of any existing damage and record it in writing to avoid any disputes at a later date.

B. Accept the site as it exists and be responsible for demolition work required.

C. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, notify the Consultant immediately for directions. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of the Consultant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Drainage Layer: 300 mm layer of engineered fill comprised of:

1. Base Course: 200 mm (8 inches) pit run gravel.

2. Top Course: 160 mm (6½ inches) of 20 mm (3/4 inch) clean crushed gravel.

B. Drain Tile:

1. Rigid Perforated Tile: 100 mm (4”) diameter, surrounded by drain gravel, connected to the on-site storm system, complete with clean outs.

2. Rigid Unperforated Drain Tile: 100 mm (4”) diameter, surrounded by drain gravel connected to sump pit.

3. Rainwater Leaders: Shall be connected to sump pits with solid drain tile 100 mm (4”) diameter, surrounded by 300 mm (12”) drain granules.

C. Geotextile Fabric or Filter Fabric: Non-woven synthetic fabric with an equivalent opening size greater than the No. 100 Sieve and a grab strength of not less than 100 pounds.

D. Polyethylene sheeting for erosion protection.

E. Sump Pits: Construct of existing site rocks to areas indicated and where not indicated to recommendation of Owner’s Geotechnical Consultant.

F. Vapour Barrier: 10 mil polyethylene vapour barrier conforming to CAN/CGSB 51.34 M86 Type 4.

G. Imported Granular Materials: shall meet the requirements expressed in the following table:

80 MM PIT RUN GRAVEL 20 MM BASECOURSE GRAVEL SIEVE SIZE (MM) % PASSING BY MASS SIEVE SIZE (MM) % PASSING BY MASS

80.000 100 25.000 55 – 100 20.000 100 12.500 42 – 84 12.500 64 – 100 5.000 26 – 65 5.000 36 – 72 1.250 11 – 47 1.250 12 – 42


0.315 3 – 30 0.315 4 – 22 0.080 0 – 8 0.080 3 - 6

H. Base Course Gravel: Clean, crushed gravel, placed directly below slabs on grade, 20 mm, minus well graded to achieve a dense structural fill. Fill shall be to Consultant’s approval prior to installation.

1. Drainage Layer: 300 mm thick engineered fill of 200 mm pit run gravel with 160 mm of 20 crushed basecourse gravel.

2. Fill other than as indicated above: Free draining material <5% by weight passing #200 sieve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Take necessary precautions to fully protect existing landscape materials from damage.

B. Make good, at no expense to the Owner, damage or disruption caused to adjoining property utilities and services not called for as part of the Work of this contract. Perform repair work only after consultation with the Consultant, appropriate parties and authorities and to standards and codes of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Coordinate work of this section with installation of landscaping, paving and services. Clear surplus excavation and debris from building area operations for work of this section.

D. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations.

3.2 PROTECTION, SHORING AND DEWATERING

A. Provide shoring, bracing, stabilization required to prevent caving in of banks and excavations. Place shoring so as to be independent of footings and foundation walls. Leave in position until forms have been removed, dampproofing or waterproofing completed, building drainage installed and approval given to proceed with backfilling.

B. Make good immediately damage or disturbance, settlement of collapse caused due to inadequate measures being taken by the Contractor to prevent same at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

D. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure.

E. Maintain natural vegetation on slope.

3.3 EXCAVATION

A. Subgrade soil may be sensitive to moisture changes and may be expected to lose strength if disturbed in a saturated condition. Perform excavation and earthwork as much as possible during dry weather.

B. Remove and dispose of loose fill and soft soil as required.


C. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. Excavations sides, adjacent to footings to be separated by at least a 2 (horizontal) to 1 (vertical slopeline), or as otherwise required to meet WCB requirements.

D. Remove rocks, boulders, and cobbles greater than .75 mm (3 inches) from footing areas and locate as directed by Consultant.

E. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Consultant who will make an inspection of subgrade conditions. Compact exposed subgrade surface, replace over excavated zones with sand fill material compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density.

F. Remove and dispose of unsuitable excavated material and dispose of at approved off-site location. Replace with approved fill.

3.4 ROUGH GRADING

A. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation.

B. Ensure that grading directs water away from foundation elements.

C. Prevent ponding adjacent to building.

D. Where Owner does not accept separate price for sub-drainage system, ensure runoff from roofs is directed onto 24” x 24” x 2” thick unit paver splash pads and directed away from the building.

E. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the same percentage optimum density as underlying subgrade material.

3.5 BUILDING DRAINAGE

A. Place drainage course under slab of thickness and material specified in Part 2 of this section. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations. Compact to 95% of Standard Proctor Maximum dry density.

3.6 ACCESS ROAD AND PARKING AREA (SEPARATE PRICE)

A. Subgrade: The exposed gravel surface of the cleared lot is considered a suitable subgrade surface.

B. Imported Gravel: Where additional imported gravel is required to reach subgrade elevations, provide 80 mm (3½ inches) of pit run gravel meeting the gradation limits presented in the Table “Imported Granular Materials” in Part 2 of this Section. Thoroughly scarify surface of access roads and parking areas, moisture condition, and recompact to 98% of Standard Proctor maximum dry density.

3.7 COMPACTION, BACKFILL AND FILL

A. General: Control compaction during construction. Provide minimum percentage of density recommended by Owner’s Geotechnical Consultant.

B. Structures: Compact backfill or fill material in maximum pre-compacted 300 mm (12") layers including drainage layer to at least 98% Standard Proctor maximum dry density.

C. Backfill and Fill – General: Place acceptable material in layers to required subgrade elevations, as specified.


1. Avoid placing fill on or near the crest of the slope.

2. Do not backfill trenches or foundations until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by Consultant. Notify Consultant a minimum of one (1) week prior to the inspection being required. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.

3. Under slabs sand blinding may be required to bring sub-base to a condition to receive polyethylene moisture barrier.

3.8 FINISH GRADING

A. Grade areas around perimeter of buildings to provide a minimum 5% grade away from buildings.

B. Finish grades shall be within 12 mm (1/2") plus or minus the grade indicated. Regrade areas that do not meet requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.9 PROTECTION AND REPAIR

A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.

C. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shape, refill as required and compact to required density prior to further construction.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 02555 CARMACKS, YUKON BELOW GRADE AIR PREHEAT SYSTEM APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 02555 BELOW GRADE EARTH TUBE AIR INTAKE PREHEAT SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide below grade pipe system with accessories for a complete in-ground air preheat system, as indicated and specified. Refer to Mechanical Drawings.

B. Provide testing of system to ensure positive drainage away from buildings.


A. 02300 Earthwork.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each product specified.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout and connections to adjacent construction. Shop drawing shall be a minimum 1/8” / ft. of 2% minimum.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System consists of:

1. Air intake on exterior from mechanical room to outer bank. See A5 for approx location.

2. Install Ducting as per mechanical drawings

3. Tie in to Solar Array.

B. System shall be sized to provide air rate to HVAC system as specified by Mechanical Engineer.


A. Pre-construction Meeting:

1. Convene pre-construction meeting one (1) week prior to layout of work to ensure requirements for system are in place. In attendance: Owner, Contractor, Consultant, Mechanical Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pipe: Refer to Specifications by Mechanical Consultant.

B. Adhesive: Pipe manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, producing non-leaking joints.

C. Pipe-cleaning Fluid: Liquid sterilant / anti-fungal agent designed to leave pipes clean, dry, and free of toxic substances.

D. Fan(s) as per Mechanical Eng.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Backfill: In accordance with Section 02300 Earthwork.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 02555 CARMACKS, YUKON BELOW GRADE AIR PREHEAT SYSTEM APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

B. Insect Screen: Galvanized metal insect screen at air intake locations, grid 1/16”, securely fastened with stainless steel hose clamps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine grades of building sites with system installer present to ensure positive slope and other features required for installation are in place. Correct unsatisfactory conditions

B. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install system in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prior to backfilling, test system with water to ensure positive drainage and to ensure intake air can meet air volume requirements of future HVAC equipment.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Promptly, as the work proceeds, clean debris from the site and leave in tidy condition.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 02780 CARMACKS, YUKON UNIT PAVERS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 02780 UNIT PAVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide unit paving on compacted sand base or on pedestals as indicated and specified.

B. Provide unit pavers at walkways, patios and roof decks, and as indicated and specified.

C. Provide bedding and joint sand to conform to standards.


A. 02300 Earthwork.

B. 06100 Rough Carpentry.

C. 07500 Membrane Roofing.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C936-01 Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units.

B. CSA A231.1-99 (R2003), Precast Concrete Paving Slabs.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples:

1. Submit five (5) full size samples of each type of paving unit specified indicating full range of colour and texture to be expected in completed work.

2. Submit two (2) samples of each accessory item specified.

3. Edge restraints.

4. Filter Fabric: two samples 12 inch by 12 inch sample of filter fabric specified.

5. Paver pedestals and spacers.

6. Submit sample of proposed sealer applied to unit pavers specified.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of pavers, pedestal support system, and details of coordination with adjacent construction.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver and supporting pedestal units from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.


C. Mock-up: Erect field-constructed mock-up on site in location and size as directed by Owner. Mock-up may be incorporated into work upon Consultant’s approval. Do not start work on remaining areas until approval is received.


A. Weather Limitations: Protect unit paver work against freezing when temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling. Where installed on setting beds, protect unit paver work in hot weather to prevent excessive evaporation.

B. Prior to ordering materials, review paver dimensions and drawings with the Consultant to ensure pavers are adequately coordinated with the design.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Concrete Pavers: Subject to compliance with specifications, the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Hydra Pressed Slabs, by Abbotsford Concrete Products Ltd. T: 1-800-663-4091.

2. Westcon Pavers. T: 604-888-0555.

3. Or approved alternative.

B. Pedestals:

1. Subject to compliance with specifications the following manufacturers are acceptable:

a. Bison Screw Jack (adjustable) and Fixed Height Stackable Pedestal System, by Bison Screwjack Co. T: 1-888-412-4766.

b. Appian Way Pedestal System.

c. Or approved alternative.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Colours: To be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.

B. Concrete Pavers: Solid concrete units, made from normal weight aggregates, to CSA A231.1.

1. Flexural Strength: Minimum 650 psi (4.5 Mpa).

2. Compressive Strength: Minimum 8,000 psi (55MPa).

3. Freeze-Thaw Durability: Less than 500g/m2 loss of mass after 28 cycles when tested in accordance to CSA A231.1.

4. Water Absorption: Maximum 5%.

5. Warpage: Less than 2 mm in 450 mm length or width.

6. Dimensional Tolerances:

a. Length and Width: 1/16”.


b. Thickness: 1/8”.

C. Large Unit Pavers: Coloured concrete square pavers conforming to: CSA A231.2.

D. Small Unit Pavers: Coloured concrete pavers conforming to CSA A 231.2

1. Entry Area and South Facing Patio: 8 7/8” X4 7/16 “ X 2 3/8” .

E. Filter Fabric – Roof Location: As recommended by paver manufacturer for installation indicated.

F. Pedestals: Acceptable to paver manufacturer and as required to achieve a level paver installation over sloping plywood deck.

G. Sand: Clean free running sand free of debris, soil or clay.

H. Sealer: Provide clear non-yellowing sealer to Consultant's approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions to receive pavers with Installer present. Review for compliance with manufacturer’s requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Verify roof membrane installation is completed, inspected, and approved.

C. Verify defect in roof membrane have been repaired to satisfaction of roof membrane manufacturer prior to installation of pavers.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free substrate.

B. Maintain sub-paver drainage area clear and free from debris to allow free flow of water to drains.

C. Coordinate paver installation with irrigation and electrical subcontractors.

D. Installation of pavers and pedestals shall be in conformance with requirements of waterproofing manufacturer and shall not impair performance of waterproofing materials.

E. At Grade: Install over minimum 150 mm (6”) compacted sand base to 95 SPD with tight butt joints.

F. At Roof: Prior to placing paver, place 9”x9” pad of roofing sheet or protective pad under each pedestal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OVER PEDESTALS

A. Install pavers accurately, aligning and maintaining uniform spacing, with straight joints from end to end. Seat edge of paver tightly against spacing rib of pedestal in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.

B. Shim as necessary to provide support for all four corners of each paver.


C. Install pavers to vary not more than 1/16” in elevation between adjacent pavers or more than 1/16” variation from surface plane elevation of any individual paver.

D. Field Cutting: Use power saws to cut pavers. Produce lines cut straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent chipping.

E. Expansion and Control Joints: Of width and at locations indicated.

F. Provide edge conditions as required. Verify edge conditions prior to placing paving units.

G. Install paver pedestal system on filter fabric over insulation or waterproof membrane as recommended by paver and pedestal manufacturers. Conduct work in a manner which protects waterproof membrane.

H. Place pavers by lowering horizontally rather than nosing into position. Align and shim as required as work progresses.

I. Provide additional pedestal pavers below planters to support planter loads.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected surfaces.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Install pavers during the final stage of construction project. If this is not possible, then place a protective covering over pavers until other sub-trades have completed their work.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 02844 CARMACKS, YUKON BERM CONSTRUCTION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 02844 BERM CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Construct berms at north entry and parking areas as indicated and specified.


A. 02300 Earthwork.

B. 02900 Planting.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Acceptable soil: Soil for berm construction acceptable to Owner’s Geotechnical Consultant.

B. Boulders: Rocks greater than 300 mm (12 inches) in diameter. Refer to Section 02300 Earthwork.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Soil: Refer to Section 02300 Earthwork.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine locations where berms are to be constructed with Owner’s Engineer present.

B. Ensure subsurface conditions are acceptable to Owner’s Geotechnical Consultant prior to start of work.

C. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 EXECUTION

A. Grade berm material in lifts of 300 mm (12 inches) and compact to 98% Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density.

B. Ensure slopes of berms confirm to elevations indicated.

C. Remove rocks from surface as compaction is completed and deposit in a location acceptable to the consultant.

D. Protect berm from wet or inclement weather until planting operations are complete by covering with 6 mil polyethylene sheeting and maintaining sheeting in place.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 02845 CARMACKS, YUKON BOULDER MOVEMENT AND PLACEMENT APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 02845 BOULDER MOVEMENT AND PLACEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Relocate boulders uncovered during excavation, and boulders situated on top of existing site, as indicated and as directed by Consultant.


A. 02300 Earthwork.

B. 02844 Berm Construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boulder: Rock material ranging in size from 12 inches in diameter to 60 inches in diameter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ensure areas to accept boulders have been graded and compacted in a manner acceptable to the Consultant, draining away from the building.

B. Mark boulders with non permanent colored chalk to facilitate initial placement into groupings.

3.2 EXECUTION

A. Initial Placement: locate boulders in clusters as directed by Consultant generally locating larger boulders to centre of grouping.

B. Final Placement: Relocate boulders to final location with Consultant present. Ensure boulders are stabilized, allowing no movement.

C. Remove boulders deemed unsuitable for use by Consultant. Remove boulders that have cracked or broken during initial placement and which in the Consultant’s opinion, present sharp unsafe edges.

D. Spray boulders clean and remove soil and chalk marks.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 02900 CARMACKS, YUKON PLANTING, TREE RETENTION AND RELOCATION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 02900 PLANTING, TREE RETENTION AND RELOCATION (if applicable)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide landscaping and planting work as indicated and specified on drawings.

B. Protect existing trees, plants and native grasses identified for retention.

C. Relocate existing plants as directed by Consultant.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. British Columbia Landscape Standard, 1997.


A. Provide materials, labor, and equipment necessary for finish grading; importing topsoil, topsoil preparation, amendments and installation of trees, shrubs, groundcover; and protection, maintenance, guarantee and replacement of plants; and related items necessary to complete the work indicated.

B. Work includes providing necessary equipment for watering and maintenance required until final acceptance, for establishing planting areas.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Plant Material Documentation:

1. Within 30 days after award of Contract, submit documentation that plant materials identified for retention have been tagged and protected or relocated and properly stored.


A. Installer Qualifications: To be a "specialist" in landscape installation.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery:

1. Protect plants during relocation to prevent damage. Protect trees during transport by tying in branches and covering exposed branches.

2. Protect seed and sod during relocation from drying out or becoming contaminated.

B. Storage:

1. Protect plants from sun and drying winds.

2. Keep plant materials away from contaminants.

3. Maintain and protect plant material not to be planted within four (4) hours in a safe, healthy, vigorous condition.

C. Handling: Protect plants from injury during handling and transportation.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 02900 CARMACKS, YUKON PLANTING, TREE RETENTION AND RELOCATION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Plant during period’s normal for optimum growth, as determined by season, weather conditions, and accepted practice. Planting operations may be conducted under unseasonable conditions, without additional compensation, and by accepting FULL responsibility for any subsequent, resulting losses.

B. Underground Conditions:

1. Be cognizant of utility lines and underground obstructions. Coordinate with the work of other sections.

2. Be familiar with utility, irrigation, mechanical, and electrical plans so that digging/ drilling operations do not damage lines.

3. Call for utility locates prior to digging.

C. Satisfactorily repair and replace at Contractor's expense, damaged buildings, equipment, utilities, paving, surfacing, and forms damaged as a result of operations.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Phase in properly with Consultant’s reviewed and accepted Planting Schedule.

B. Coordinate ordering of materials immediately following General Contract award. Ensure that specified sizes and quantities are furnished and installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Plant Materials: Relocate existing plant materials. Supplement with native species acceptable to Owner.

2.2 STAKING MATERIAL

A. Stake street trees with minimum two (2) 50 mm (2”) diameter pressure-treated pine stakes driven a minimum of 600 mm [two feet (2'-0")] into the ground. Top of stake shall be 1.8 m [six feet (6')] above finish grade and stand vertical. Tie tree to stake with care ensuring no damage to tree.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section with Installer present. Ensure conditions have been approved by Consultant. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Beginning work constitutes your acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual layout in relation to drawings. Make adjustments as required by Consultant, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Preparation includes soil preparation in planting areas, tree pits and finish grading necessary or incidental to planting operations.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 02900 CARMACKS, YUKON PLANTING, TREE RETENTION AND RELOCATION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 3

B. Plant Locations: Stake tree locations and positions shrubs above ground for Consultant's review. Make required field adjustments as directed without additional cost to the Owner. Avoid obstructions such as power lines, electrical equipment, drain lines and drains, irrigation lines and heads.

C. Protect adjacent properties, surfaces, and surrounding areas to preclude harm during work of this Section.

D. Provide necessary planting safeguards required until Provisional Acceptance of the project is accomplished, or for such time as required to assure vigorous establishment of the plant material.

E. Protect unfinished work when stopping for the day.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Trees:

1. Review of finished grade and excavate tree planting pit as required.

2. Place tree ball in upright position in center of pit; release root covering; spread roots if bare root. Place roots to have a natural spread and distribution.

3. Cut and spread circling roots encountered. Thoroughly pack and puddle planting mix around roots. Take care not to injure root systems while back-filling and compacting.

4. Thoroughly water pit when half full of soil.

5. After water settles, fill again with planting mix and water, then compact to a grade of not more than 13 mm (l/2") higher than original ball.

6. Stake trees immediately after planting, as detailed. Trees and their supports are required to be vertical.

B. Shrubs and Groundcovers:

1. Review of finish grade. Excavate planting pockets where indicated and as directed.

2. Set plants upright in center of hole flush with finish grade. Release root covering; spread roots. Place root for a natural spread and distribution.

3. Cut and spread circling roots encountered. Backfill with planting mix to finish grade.

4. Work soil well around roots and water thoroughly. Heel tamp to compact backfill and provide slight depression as watering saucer and water again.

5. Take care to not injure root systems while backfilling and compacting planting mix.

6. Fertilize at specified rate, apply uniformly around root spread circumference under 2" cover of planting mix.

7. Install plants at triangular spacing indicated. Make straight, evenly spread rows.

C. Mulching:

1. Install organic mulch to a minimum 50 mm (2 inches) compacted depth in shrub and groundcover beds, planters and tree planting areas.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 02900 CARMACKS, YUKON PLANTING, TREE RETENTION AND RELOCATION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 4 3.4 PRUNING AND REPAIR

A. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, prune new trees only as directed, to repair. Repair injuries. Do not over-prune.

B. Pruning: Do not change the natural habit or shape of the plant. Make cuts flush. Do not remove leader. Trace back to living tissue and remove injured cambium or cuts over 19 mm (3/4") diameter, bruises, and bark scars. Smooth and shape wounds so as not to retain water.

C. Existing trees as shown on the drawings shall be pruned by other work forces.

3.5 RESTORATION, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove excess waste material daily. When planting in an area is complete, clear the area of debris, spoil piles and containers.

B. Where existing turf areas have been scarred or damaged, restore these damaged areas to their original condition.

C. Protect Seeded and Planted Areas:

D. Immediately after seeding and planting protect the area against traffic or other use by erecting barricades and placing signs at appropriate intervals. Maintain the barricades and signs until provisional acceptance.

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain landscape areas from time of installation until Provisional Acceptance of the entire project. Remove dead plants as directed.

1. Water plantings by thorough sprinkling. Provide as needed to keep the soil moist and the plants healthy. Prevent wilting. Prevent soil erosion, particularly on sloped areas. Repair any occurring erosion gullies.

2. Water trees as required for vigorous thriving condition. Prune, cultivate, fertilize, spray and perform other necessary operations. Spray only as required and as acceptable to Consultant. Plantings will not be accepted until active, healthy growth is evident. Maintain tree supports, and the like intact. Adjust as required to maintain firm support throughout Guarantee Period.

B. Area and Planter Drains: Maintain area and planter drains clean and free draining at all times.

3.7 FINAL REVIEW - ACCEPTANCE

A. During, and or at the end of one (1) year guarantee period, request final review for acceptance of landscape planting work. Make required replacement and repairs prior to review.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 03300 CARMACKS, YUKON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide Cast-in-Place Concrete as indicated and specified


A. 03305 Concrete Waterproofing –

B. 09650 Resilient Flooring.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. CAN/CSA A 3000-98, Cementitious Materials Compendium.

B. CAN/CSA A 23.1-00, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.

C. CAN/CSA A 23.2-00, Methods of Test for Concrete.

D. CAN/CSA Standard G30.5-M 1983 (R1998), Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

E. CAN/CSA Standard G30.18-M 92 (R1998), Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

F. ASTM C39/C39M-05, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

G. ASTM C172-99, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.

H. ACI 2002, Manual of Concrete Practice.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide proposal for equipment, materials and schedule for manufacturing concrete on site.

C. Mix Designs: Provide concrete mix designs indicating percentage of fly ash. Include coloured concrete components in design.

D. Samples: Submit two (2) heavy duty plastic bags full of aggregate proposed for use in mix.


A. Levels of finished concrete floors shall be within 6 mm of established elevations in any 6.0 m square area, and shall be sufficiently even to contact 3.0 m long straight-edge with a tolerance of 6 mm.

B. Concrete Testing: The Owner will arrange and pay for Concrete testing under a separate contract. Cooperate fully with Owner’s testing agency.

C. Pre-installation Conference: Prior to pouring concrete conduct a pre-installation conference. Attendees shall include Owner, Owner’s Structural Engineer, Consultant and Installer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Water: to CAN/CSA A23.1.

B. Cement: Portland Cement, to CAN/CSA A3000, Type 10, colour gray.

C. Fly Ash: If available, to percentage acceptable to Consultant

D. Aggregate: Natural sand, gravel, or crushed rock: CAN/CSA A23.1 shall govern for approval and control of fine and coarse aggregates and their grading.

1. Use coarse aggregate of Group 1.20 mm to No.4.

E. Non-Shrink Grout: Embeco as manufactured by the Master Builders Company, or V-3 Premixed Construction Grout by W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd., or Ferrogrout by Sternson Limited.

F. Slab Edge Expansion Strip: 12 mm x 150 mm Flexcell by Sternson Ltd.

G. Reinforcing Steel: To CSA G30.12 marked with grade identification by permanent rolled indentations in bars; Canadian-produced; of types indicated on drawings; billet steel; deformed, Grade 400.

H. Welded Wire Mesh: To CSA G30.5. (Flat Sheets)

I. Vapour Barrier: 10 mils ( 0.25 mm ) thick polyethylene film, UV rated.

J. Zinc Strips: 3 mm thick zinc strips for exposed control joints

2.2 MIXES

A. Base mix design on CSA23.1, Alternate Number 1. Produce concrete of strength indicated on drawings and as specified with slump, water cement ratio, cement type and aggregate.

B. Provide ready-mixed (mixed in transit) concrete, except that for miscellaneous use in quantities of less than 1 cubic meter, site mixed concrete may be used. Ready-mixed concrete shall meet specified requirements of ASTM Standard C94 for mixing procedures.

C. Design a mix that avoids segregation of concrete materials and excessive bleeding.

D. A maximum of 2% air entrainment shall result from the addition of a plasticizing admixture.

E. Concrete Standards as indicated on Structural drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Ensure that there is neither water present nor flooding water permitted on foundation beds and skim coats where footings and other concrete work are to be placed. Place concrete only on frost free ground. Remove previously frozen bearing surfaces, and fill with concrete as specified for footings.

B. Ensure foundations bear on undisturbed soil.


1. If bearing surfaces are disapproved because conditions do not meet those anticipated during design, make adjustments as directed by Consultant. Extra cost for such adjustments will be paid as an extra to the Contract.

2. No extra payment will be made for adjustments made necessary because of damage to bearing surfaces caused by weather, traffic, or removal of frozen material, or by presence of adjacent construction or services incorporated in the Work.

C. Ensure compacted fill has been placed to meet specified requirements; and under-slab services have been installed, inspected, tested and approved.

D. Drainage Layer: as specified in Section 02300 Earthwork.

E. Vapour Barrier: Place directly under slabs on grade. Lap sheets 150 mm minimum and seal with tape. Carry sheets up perimeter walls 150 mm. Arrange laps so top lap occurs in direction of concrete spreading action.

F. Place reinforcing steel as indicated. Tie as per reference codes. Chair wire mesh at 900 mm on center each way and tie to chairs.

3.2 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT

A. Steel Reinforcement: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers as required. Splicing will be a minimum of 36 bar diameters unless a longer splice is indicated on the structural drawings.

D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverage’s for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with, wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Maintain minimum clear coverage indicated on the drawings.

1. In no case shall clear cover be less than 2”.

2. Provide greater clear coverage as per CRSI specifications.

3.3 JOINTS

A. Joints: Locate and install construction, isolation, and contraction joints in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings.

B. Where control joints are not shown on the drawings, they shall be placed as indicated below:


1. Maximum 15 feet between control joints.

2. Maximum 400 sf contained within any control joints.

3. Spacing of control joints in one direction shall not exceed spacing of control joints in perpendicular direction by more than 1:1.75.

C. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface or strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris.

1. Contraction joints to be formed by saw cuts must be made as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate.

2. Coordinate slab cuts with detail Drawings for areas to receive concrete staining.

D. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete.

B. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by manufacturer of items to be attached thereto.

C. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface.

D. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds.

3.5 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete as specified in CSA Standard A23.1, under supervision of a competent supervisor.

B. If rain begins after concrete is placed and before it is set, protect with waterproof covers until set.

C. Complete discharge of ready mix concrete load within two (2) hours from time water was added to dry material. Reduce time to one (1) hour if materials are heated.

3.6 FINISHES

A. Apply rough-formed finish, defined in ACI 301, to concrete surfaces indicated or not exposed to public view.

B. Apply smooth-formed finish, defined in ACI 301, to concrete surfaces indicated and exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting.

C. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.

D. Apply smooth-rubbed finish to smooth-formed finished concrete surfaces indicated or exposed to public view.


E. Finishing Floors and Slabs: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, re-straightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces.

1. Float Finish: Apply float finish, defined in ACI 301, to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing.

2. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.

a. After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and re-straighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

b. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

3. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete, broom with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route, to platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Cure concrete as specified in CSA Standard A23.1

B. Ensure that freshly placed concrete is protected from mechanical shock and contact with injurious substances.

C. Wet cure concrete flatwork for four (4) days, use burlap or approved geotextile cloth. Supply Mechanic to assure that surfaces are kept wet.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (SEPARATE PRICE)

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement.

3.9 REPAIRING

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Consultant. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architects approval

3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. Protect concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

1. Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause excessive moisture loss.

2. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.


3. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, or curing compound.

B. Do not overlap or seal kraft paper edges at areas to receive chemical staining. Sealing and overlapping of protection causes uneven curing and is the main cause for unacceptable chemically stained concrete finishes.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.

3.12 ADJUSTMENT

A. Immediately cease further concrete placing on advice that concrete already in place has been disapproved by the Consultant or the testing personnel, or that it has failed tests to which it was subjected.

B. Work located out of place, exceeding specified tolerance, improperly placed, exhibiting excessive honeycombing, or not otherwise meeting specified requirements shall be disapproved.

C. Replace disapproved work to meet requirements of structural design intent and qualities described in this Specification in a manner approved by Consultant. Replacement of work shall include reinforcement of structure if proposed and approved by Consultant.

D. Remove from the site excess and waste materials and debris resulting from work of this Section from the site.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 03305 CARMACKS, YUKON CONCRETE WATERPROOFING APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 03305 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide a concrete admixture where indicated that when added to plastic mix will permanently waterproof, water reduce and air entrain hardened concrete by way of chemically promoting total hydration through a catalyst form of water bearing crystals.

B. Provide written materials, concrete mix design and site services necessary to complete the installation as specified.


A. 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. CAN/CSA-A23.1-00 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.

B. CAN/CSA-A23.2-00 Methods of Test for Concrete.

C. CAN/ CSA-A23.3-94 Design of Concrete Structures.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Testing agency: Testing agency responsible to Owner.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Product shall have a history of ten years of successful use and must be accompanied by a list of job sites of a similar nature.

B. Installer Qualifications: The addition of KIM to pre-approved mix design shall be by a concrete ready-mix supplier approved by the manufacturer or by a non-approved ready-mix supplier or contractor under direct supervision of an independent materials engineering company.

C. Admixture: Design concrete mix in accordance with standard recommended practices for selecting proportions for concrete, ACI – 221. Add KIM to pre-approved plastic mix design at a rate of two percent of cementitious content at ready-mix plant or job site.

D. Concrete waterproofing admixture shall be tested in accordance with general recommendations of latest proposed drafts of the National Standards of Canada, CAN/CSA A266.1-M (ASTM C494 Type D), water-reducing, set retarding and strength-increasing admixtures for concrete.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive product literature of detail specifications, available performance test data, and instructions for additive addition.

C. Certificates: Prior to delivery of materials submit the following:

1. Certificates of Conformance: Manufacturer’s certification materials meet specifications.

2. Laboratory Test Reports: Copies of test reports specified or in reference publications. Test reports shall be accompanied by certificates from manufacturer certifying previously tested material is of same type, quality, manufacture and make as proposed for project.


1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in unbroken original packages bearing manufacturer’s name, brand designation, batch number and date of manufacture.

B. Store materials in a dry storage area and prevent contact with moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM

A. Subject to compliance with specifications the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Kryton International Inc., 8280 Ross Street, Vancouver, BC, Canada, V5X 4C6. Tel: (604) 324-8280 or approved alternative.

a. KIM (Krystol Internal Membrane) waterproofing admixture.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Cementitious admixture: cement, quartz silica and other chemicals which promote complete crystal hydration growth of concrete, free of oils, stearates, chlorides and sodium based products. Manufacturer sahall certify, in writing, the absence of these materials.

B. Waterstop slurry: Cementitious powder containing high growth organic producing chemicals with ability to grow and penetrate a minimum depth of four inches in both directions from coated surface.

C. Waterstop: KIM Waterstop as per Krystol Specification #3, which consists of the cementitious waterproofing compound, KIM Waterstop Slurry,

D. Construction Joint/ Waterstop Cap: KIM Waterstop Grout, Krystol T1/T2, Krystol Bari-cote and Krystol Plug.

E. Grouting Mortar at Cold Joints and Cracks: Compatible with cementitious crystal producing chemicals, containing no chlorides or artificial accelerators, non-shrink, non-toxic, fast setting (initial 25 minutes) containing high growth organic chemicals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Conform to manufacturer’s safety precautions recommendations, manufacturer’s MSDS printed literature and current WCB regulations.

B. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and specifications.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Review manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations.

B. Install Krystol Waterstop block out using wood spacers to required size of 45mm x 45mm (tapering to 35 mm). Remove block out strip when forms are removed and fill with dry mix of KIM Waterstop Grout.

C. Ensure admixture is in addition to total weight of cementitious content. Add in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Mix admixture for a minimum ten minutes.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Brush coat construction joints, cold joints, and slab joints, with KIM Waterstop Slurry at a rate of 1 kg per square meter to produce an even film of uniform thickness as recommended by manufacturer. Ensure edges, corners and crevices receive an adequate thickness of slurry coating.

B. Treat construction joints with coat of KIM Waterstop Slurry at manufacturer’s recommended rate.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 03350 CARMACKS, YUKON LIGHT WEIGHT STRUCTURALCONCRETE APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 03350 LIGHT WEIGHT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide complete floor underlayment installed and ready to receive finished flooring materials in locations shown on drawings.


A. Applicator: Installation shall be by applicator authorized by lightweight concrete manufacturer.


A. Materials shall be delivered in their original, unopened packages and be protected from the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site.


A. Underlayment is for interior use only. Before, during, and after installation, building interior shall be enclosed and maintained at a temperature above 50 degrees F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Gyp-Crete Floor Underlayments, Hamel MN or Forta-Fill Gypsum Concrete Floor Underlayments, Hacker Industries or approved alternative.

B. Gypsum Cement: Compressive strength 1500 psi - 1800 psi Gyp-Crete Residential/Gyp-Crete "2000" 50/50 Mix Blend or approved alternative.

C. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer.

D. Sand: Comply with manufacturers specifications.

E. Water: Potable, free from impurities.

2.2 MIXES

A. Gypsum cement mix design shall be 1.4 cubic feet of sand per 80 pound bag.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine subfloor to ensure they are sound, broom clean, and contaminant-free.

B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Start of work implies acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks and voids with recommended filling compound.

B. Ensure building interior is enclosed and maintain a temperature above 50 degrees F. until structure and subfloor temperatures are stabilized.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 03350 CARMACKS, YUKON LIGHT WEIGHT STRUCTURALCONCRETE APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

C. Coordinate work of this section with other trades to minimize conflict.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Methods

1. Levels 3-6: Install 3/4" deep gypsum underlayment over subfloor.

2. Provide continuous mechanical ventilation and adequate heat to rapidly remove moisture from the area until underlayment is dry.

3. Allow seven days drying time prior to installing finish flooring.


A. Test underlayment in accordance with modified ASTM: C472-79 using 2" x 2" cube molds when requested by the Owner. Testing will be at an additional cost to the Owner unless the work is found to be inadequate.

3.5 PROTECTION

1. Place temporary wood planking over underlayment wherever it will be subjected to heavy wheeled traffic or concentrated loads.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 03400 CARMACKS, YUKON PRE-CAST CONCRETE APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 03400 PRE-CAST CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide plant Pre-Cast Concrete as indicated and specified.



1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI).

B. ASTM C33-01 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

C. ASTM C150-00 Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

D. ASTM C404-97 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.

E. ASTM C476-01 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.

F. ASTM A615/A615M-00 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

G. American Welding Society (AWS).

H. Precast Concrete Institute (PCI).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings

1. Show in-place location, fabrication details, plans, elevations, anchorages, reinforcement, connection details and methods, dimensions, finishes, relationships to adjacent materials, and erection and placement.

2. Show identification marks, coordinated to Shop Drawings, and date of manufacture on each unit to facilitate hauling and erection.

3. Drawings to be stamped and signed by a licensed Structural Engineer licensed in Yukon

4. Territory for reinforcing requirements and anchorage and connection requirements.

C. Samples:

1. Three (3), 300 mm x 300 mm (12 inch x 12 inch) by appropriate thickness, of each type of unit and finished facing shown and specified for approval of colour and texture. Submit samples prior to fabrication of units.


A. Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in production, delivery, and erection of Pre-Cast Concrete Work of the size and scope shown and specified.



A. Provide clean, non-staining blocking for lateral support sufficient to prevent bowing and warping during transportation and storage. Protect edges individually to prevent staining, chipping, or spalling of concrete. Wrap and protect units for transportation and storage. Store off ground, in dry, protected area.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Shop Drawing, design, and job site dimensions to ensure accuracy of placement and fit with adjacent materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cement: Portland Cement to CAN/CSA A3000, Type 10, colour Gray.

B. Aggregates: Clean, hard, inert, and free of staining or deleterious material, from a single source, conforming to CAN/CSA A23.1, 19 mm (3/4 inch) maximum, light coloured.

C. Air Entrainment: Required for precast units. Quantity shall not reduce design strength of concrete mix. Provide 6 percent ± 1 ½ percent in units with ¾ inch maximum size aggregate. Provide larger percentage with smaller aggregates in accordance with ACI recommendations.

D. Water: Clean, clear, and free from deleterious amounts of salts, acids, alkalies, organic materials, oils, detergents, or other matter that may interfere with colour, curing, or strength of concrete.

E. Reinforcing: As specified in Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

F. Plates, Angles, and Anchorages:

1. Cast Into Units: Mild steel, National Building Code.

2. Mechanical inserts, and support angles, not cast into units shall be hot dipped galvanized.

G. Integral Colour: Resistive to lime and other alkalis, and shall not reduce quality of concrete below that specified.

H. Grout: ASTM C 476, with aggregates conforming to ASTM C404. Compressive strength at 28 days 2000 psi.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Flashing reglets: PVC extrusions as shown and required.

2.3 MIXES

A. Design strength, 5,000 psi at 28 days. Keep water content to a minimum, but regulate to achieve specified design strength, placement requirements, and production control.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Forms: High density overlay plywood with sufficient durability to maintain units in close tolerance.


B. Reinforcement: As required to produce units conforming to shapes, lines, and dimensions shown on reviewed Shop Drawings.

C. Finish: PCI Standards, Architectural Grade A. Sandblast to medium texture to match approved samples. Patching of damaged surfaces will not be allowed.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Concrete Testing:

1. Make one compression test at 28 days for each day's production of each type of concrete.

2. Provide 2 test specimens for each compression test.

3. Obtain concrete for specimens from actual production batch.

4. Cure specimens using same methods used for precast concrete units until units are stripped. Then moist cure specimens until test.

5. Keep quality control records available upon request.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLERS

A. Erection shall be by persons experienced and trained in placement and securing of architectural Pre-Cast Concrete units.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Erect level, plumb, and true to line.

B. Erect and secure in a manner to prevent damage to units or units in place.

C. Do not allow cumulative dimensional errors to develop. Adjustments such as shimming which would place additional stress on units will not be permitted.

D. Adhere to dimensional tolerances in accordance with PCI recommendations.

E. Replace any damaged units.

F. Joint Sealants: As specified in Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled Pre-Cast Concrete units after installation with detergent and water, using fiber brushes and sponges. Rinse thoroughly with clean water.

B. Leave in condition for application of water repellents specified in Section 09900 Paints and Coatings.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 04810 CARMACKS, YUKON UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide labour, material, and equipment necessary for the supply, delivery and erection of concrete unit masonry as indicated on the drawings and as specified.

B. Provide glass block as indicated and specified.



B. 05500 Metal Fabrications.

C. 07900 Joint Sealers.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A82-01 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

B. ASTM A185-01 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.

C. CSA A371-94(R1999) Masonry Construction for Buildings.

D. CAN/CSA-A369.1-M90(R2001) Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.

E. CSA A370-94 (R1999) Connectors for Masonry.

F. CSA A179-94 (R1999) Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.

G. CAN/CSA A3000-98 (A5-98) Cementitious Materials Compendium (Portland Cement).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.

B. Masonry tie spacing shall be designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the National Building Code 2005 with Yukon supplements.

C. Submit three samples of each type of masonry unit, glass block, mortar and connector.

D. Certification: Submit certification from manufacturer that concrete block provides ratings indicated in schedules.


A. Deliver materials to job site in dry condition.

B. Keep materials dry until use, store under waterproof cover on pallets.

C. Protect masonry units from damage.



A. Environmental requirements are as follows:

1. Air temperature 0° C to 4°C: Heat sand or mixing water to a minimum of 20°C and a maximum of 70°C.

2. Air Temperature -4°C to 0°C: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 20°C. and a maximum of 70°C.

3. Air Temperature -7°C to - 4°C: Heat sand and mixing water to a minimum of 20°C and a maximum of 70°C. Provide heat to both sides of walls. Use windbreaks when wind speed excess of 25 km/hr.

4. Air temperature -7°C. and below: Heat sand and mixing water to a minimum of 20°C. and a maximum or 70°C. Provide enclosures and heat to maintain an air temperature above 0°C. Ensure that temperature of unit when laid is not less than -7°C.

5. At temperature below 0°C., grouting may proceed providing enclosures are constructed to surround the Work and ensure that temperature of grout during placing is not less than 20°and grout in the wall is maintained above 0°C. for a 24 hour period.

6. Brace masonry walls as necessary to resist wind pressure and other lateral forces during construction.


A. Installer’s Qualifications:

1. Installer: Company specializing in installing masonry with five (5) year’s experience.

2. For the actual cutting and placing of masonry units, use only skilled journeyman masons who are thoroughly experienced with materials and methods specified and thoroughly familiar with design requirements. Use installers who are members in good standing of the Canadian Masonry Contractors Association. Use installers having proven experience on similar projects.

3. Continuous active supervisory mason foreman in attendance while masonry work is in progress.

B. Material Source: Use brands of products and materials from the same source for the entire project.

C. Protection:

1. Keep masonry dry using waterproof, non-staining coverings that extend over walls and down sides sufficient to protect walls from wind driven rain, until completed and protected by flashings or other permanent construction.

2. Provide temporary bracing and shoring of masonry work during and after erection to protect from environmental damage until permanent lateral support is in place.

3. Protect exposed masonry walls from surface scratching, shipping or damage resulting from construction activities during progress of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Mortar and Grout: To CSA A179-94.


B. Cement: Normal Portland, Type 10, to CSA A5/A8/A362-98.

C. Hydrated lime: Type "S", to ASTM C-207.

D. Grout aggregate: clean, uncoated grains of sound material and conform to CSA-A23.1-94/A23.2-94 with coarse aggregates passing a 10 mm sieve.

E. Water: Potable, free of deleterious matter and acids or alkalis.

F. Admixtures for mortar shall not be used without approval.

2.2 MORTAR MIXES

A. Use Type cement/lime mortar for loadbearing clay or concrete masonry based on proportion specification as per CSA A179-94.

B. For nonloadbearing masonry based on proportion specification in accordance with requirements of NBC.

C. Mix mortar with a paddle type mixer with one-half the water and sand placed into the operation mixer first. Then add cement, lime, the remaining water and sand. Mix materials for at least 3 minutes.

D. Water retention: Mix mortar to an initial flow of 100 to 115 and a flow after suction of not less than 70%.

E. Use mortar within 2 hours of mixing at temperatures over 25°C and within 2 1/2 hours for temperatures of 25°C or lower. Retemper using minimum amounts of water.

F. Mortar may be retempered once within 2 hours of mixing to replace water lost by evaporation.

2.3 GROUT MIXES

A. Grout: minimum compressive strength of 20 MPa at 28 days.

B. Maximum aggregate size: 10 mm diameter.

C. Grout slump: not less than 200 mm and not more than 250 mm.

D. Colour: to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.

2.4 MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: to CAN3-A165.1-94 classification H/15/A/M.

1. Manufacturer’s: Ocean Cement or approved alternative.

2. Dimensions: 190 mm (w) x 190 mm (h) x 390 mm (l).

3. Corner Units: Manufacturer’s standard to match field units.

4. Pattern: running bond.

5. Colour: Gray.

6. Face: Smooth.

2.5 GLASS MASONRY UNITS

A. Glass Block: 12” x 12” x 4” flush face with opaque infill or sand blasted face. Provide sample prior to ordering.


2.6 REINFORCING

A. Steel reinforcement to CSA A371-94, grade 400 W (weldable) and Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Joint reinforcement for concrete masonry walls: Ladder type design, width 50 mm less than nominal wall thickness. Longitudinal side rods 7 gauge diameter, cross rods 9 gauge diameter. Galvanized, conforming to ASTM A82 and ASTM A185 for weld and shear strengths.

C. For reinforced masonry requirements refer to structural drawings and specifications.

2.7 CONNECTORS

A. Masonry connectors: to CSA A370-94.

B. Veneer Ties. hot dipped galvanized in accordance with CSA A370-94 or stainless steel as required to meet code requirements.

C. At concrete block “Fero Block Shear Tie” with insulation clip. At concrete “Fero Rap Tie” with insulation clip or approved equivalent.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Flexible Membrane Flashing: self adhesive membrane as specified in 07290 Weather Restrictive Barriers.

B. Cleaning Compound: compatible with and acceptable to block manufacturer for use on their products.

C. Metal Flashing: As specified in Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before starting the work, check that existing surfaces and adjacent building components with Installer present and ensure they are of acceptable condition and placement. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Start of installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Examine drawings and coordinate installation of masonry with related sections so that this work can be performed with a minimum of cutting and patching.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent finished materials from marking or damage due to masonry work.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Build masonry true-to-line, plumb, square and level.

B. Construct exposed masonry work to CSA A371 94 requirements and tolerances.

C. Use 10 mm nominal thickness joints for 10 mm joints unless indicated otherwise.

D. Provide horizontal and vertical joints of uniform thickness except where adjustments are necessary to maintain the bond pattern.

E. Build in miscellaneous items such as bearing plates, loose angles, bolts, anchors, inserts, sleeves and conduits.


F. Build around frames previously set and braced by others. Fill hollow frames within masonry walls with mortar or grout and embed anchors.

G. Install special units as may be required to form corners, returns, offsets, reveals and indents without cut ends being exposed and without losing bond or module.

H. Fit masonry closely against electrical and plumbing outlets and stone base units, so that collars, plates and covers will overlap and conceal cuts.

I. Cull out masonry units not complying with applicable CSA standards for chips, cracks, broken corners or off-textured faces.

J. Construct masonry walls using running bond.

K. Connect interior masonry partitions at intersections by bonding, anchors or reinforcing.

L. Install control joints as specified and shown. Keep joints free of mortar.

3.4 INSTALLING UNITS

A. Do not wet concrete masonry units during erection of walls.

B. Hollow Units: Spread the mortar setting bed from the outside edge of the face shells. Gauge the amount of mortar on top and end of unit to create full joint, equivalent to the shell thickness. Avoid excessive use of mortar.

C. Solid Units: Apply mortar to both vertical and horizontal brick surfaces to create full joints.

D. Closure units must receive "double buttering" to ensure full head joints.

E. Tamp units firmly into place.

F. Do not adjust masonry units after laying. Where resetting of masonry is required, remove and clean units and reset in new mortar.

G. Tool exposed joints concave, strike concealed joints flush.

H. After mortar has initially "set up", tool joints where required, wipe wall surface with suitable brush or burlap to remove mortar protrusions and re-tool joints.

3.5 FLASHING

A. Install thru-wall flashing at horizontal interruptions of air space behind veneer such as: above wall base, angle irons, ledges and wall openings and as shown on drawings.

B. Lap ends minimum 4 inches (100 mm) and seal using specified adhesive and where not specified as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Turn flashing up a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) and attached to back up wall.

C. Ensure flashing is absolutely watertight so water is led out through weep holes. If flashing is pierced, waterproof these points carefully.

D. Create flashing “end dams” at both ends of lintels, sills and at wall ends to prevent water from traveling horizontally past the flashing ends.

E. Install vertical flashing where outer veneer returns, to prevent contact of veneer with inner wall such as at brick returns at window or door jambs.

F. Omit mortar from vertical joints, a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm), at a maximum spacing of 600 mm immediately above horizontal flashing to create weep holes.


3.6 CONNECTORS

A. Install masonry connectors in accordance with CSA A370 and CSA A371 and shop drawings. Where conflict exists between standards, the more stringent shall apply.

3.7 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Install vertical and horizontal movement joints as indicated. Keep expansion joints free of mortar, ready to receive a back-up rod faced with sealant.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Perform work in accordance with CSA A371 and to the following tolerances.

B. Variation from Mean Plane: Construct walls as true planes so that when tested with a 3 metre straight edge placed parallel to the wall in any direction, walls are true within 3 mm.

C. Variation from Plumb: Surfaces of walls shall be plumb within 6 mm in 3 metres non-cumulative.

D. Variation from Level: Not to exceed 6 mm per bay, or 6m minimum length of wall, for any course in the wall.

E. Variation from Position: Variation in location from the position shown and variations in the related position of walls and partitions shall not exceed 10 mm in any bay or a 7 m maximum distance.

F. Variation in the Sizes of Wall Openings: 6 mm maximum variation from the actual designated size of wall openings.

3.9 REPAIRING

A. On completion of concrete masonry, fill holes and cracks, remove loose mortar and repair defective work. Remove debris resulting from the work of this section into refuse bins provided. Leave floor in broom clean condition.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Protect adjacent building finishes potentially vulnerable to stains or corrosion of the cleaning agent used.

B. Soak wall with clean water and flush off loose dirt and mortar.

C. Apply the specified cleaning agent in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.

D. Rinse areas thoroughly with clean water to remove cleaning solutions, dirt and mortar residue.

E. Confirm suitability of materials and methods by cleaning a small area prior to commencement.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Keep masonry dry using waterproof, non-staining coverings that extend over walls and down side sufficient to protect walls from wind driven rain, until completed and protected by flashing or other permanent construction.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 04850 CARMACKS, YUKON STONE VENEER APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 04850 STONE VENEER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide anchored stone veneer including anchors, mortar and grout, and accessories for a complete installation as indicated and specified.

B. Stone to be obtained from local gravel operation and from excavation on site.


A. 02300 Earthwork.

B. 05500 Metal Fabrications.

C. 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

D. 06100 Rough Carpentry.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. CSA A370-94 (R1999) Connectors For Masonry.

B. CSA A371-94(R1999) Masonry Construction for Buildings.

C. CAN/CSA-A369.1-M90(R2001) Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.

D. CAN/CSA 3000-98 (A5-98) Cementitious Material Compendium (Portland Cement).

E. CSA A370-94 (R1999) Connectors for Masonry.

F. CSA A179-94 (R1999) Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.

G. CAN/CSA A3000-98 (A5-98) Cementitious Materials Compendium (Portland Cement).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalogs for anchors, stone, veneer mortar, color pigments, ties wire, and description of mortar ingredients.

C. Samples: Stockpile one cubic foot of stone for Consultant’s review on site prior to start of work.


A. Installer’s Qualifications:

1. Installer: Company specializing in installing masonry with five (5) years experience.

2. For the actual cutting and placing of masonry units, use only skilled journeyman masons who are thoroughly experienced with materials and methods specified and thoroughly familiar with design requirements. Use installers who are members in good standing of the Canadian Masonry Contractors Association. Use installers having proven experience on similar projects.

1. Continuous active supervisory mason foreman in attendance while masonry work is in progress.


B. Mock-up: Provide mock-up at a corner location, length in accordance with Consultant’s instructions, in coordination with Related Sections to indicate systems integration. Mock-up may form part of completed work if undisturbed at the date of Substantial Performance.


A. Handle and deliver products to site in a manner that prevents damage to edges and finish.

B. Protect stone from visible discoloration and from moisture.

C. Protect cementitious materials from moisture during delivery, storage and handling.


A. Environmental requirements are as follows:

1. Air temperature 0° C to 4°C: Heat sand or mixing water to a minimum of 20°C and a maximum of 70°C.

2. Air Temperature -4°C to 0°C: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 20°C. and a maximum of 70°C.

3. Air Temperature -7°C to - 4°C: Heat sand and mixing water to a minimum of 20°C and a maximum of 70°C. Provide heat to both sides of walls. Use windbreaks when wind speed excess of 25 km/hr.

4. Air temperature -7°C. and below: Heat sand and mixing water to a minimum of 20°C. and a maximum or 70°C. Provide enclosures and heat to maintain an air temperature above 0°C. Ensure that temperature of unit when laid is not less than -7°C.

5. At temperature below 0°C., grouting may proceed providing enclosures are constructed to surround the work and ensure that temperature of grout during placing is not less than 20°and grout in the wall is maintained above 0°C. for a 24 hour period.

6. Brace masonry walls as necessary to resist wind pressure and other lateral forces during construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stone: Flat-face River Rock. 4 inch x 9 inch x 6 inch deep native rock units from gravel pit to be hand selected by Contractor. Rock from excavation may also be suitable. Coordinate with Section 02300 Earthwork.

B. Cement: As specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.

C. Water: Domestic water supply, clean, potable or filtered water.

D. Sand: Masonry mortar aggregate, ASTM C144 except 5 percent minimum passing No. 100 sieve.

E. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Sealer: As recommended by stone manufacturer.


B. Anchors, Masonry Veneer Ties and Attachments: Stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel conforming to CSA 370-94. Refer to Structural Drawings for type, material and gauge.

C. Metal Lath: Welded wire fabric, heavy duty galvanized 16 gauge x 16 gauge, 2” x 2” mesh.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive stone veneer with Installer present, and ascertain that preparation of the substrate is complete.

B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mask-off or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces from mortar.

B. Install stone veneer units with anchor ties in accordance with the National Building Code.

C. Apply spot bedding at each anchor tie.

D. Install anchors at no more than 0.18 m2 of area per anchor.

E. Fill vertical and horizontal joints exposed to view as the veneer is laid up.

F. Tool exposed face joints when mortar is firm. Rake back joint, with an approved masonry tool to achieve “Blackcomb Blend” appearance.

G. Lay stone veneer units in accordance with commercial practice. Lay plumb, level and true to lines appropriate to veneer system.

H. Apply sealant in non-exposed test area prior to applying over entire area. Review color of test sealed units with Consultant prior to full sealant application.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 05500 CARMACKS, YUKON METAL FABRICATIONS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide metal fabrications with fasteners and accessories for complete installation.

B. Provide metal stairs, handrails, guardrails, ladders, bollards and architectural woodwork support brackets.

C. Provide tempered glass panels to stair rails and guardrails as indicated and specified.


A. 06100 Rough Carpentry.

B. 06400 Architectural Woodwork.

C. 08800 Glazing.

D. 09900 Paints and Coatings.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. CAN/CSA S 16.1 Limit States Design of Steel Structures.

B. CSA Standards W 47.1-92 Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures and W59-m1989 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

C. CAN/CSA –G164-M92 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.

D. CAN/CSA-G40/G40.21-92 General Requirements for rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steels.

E. National Building Code, 2005, Yukon edition..

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Rolled shapes and structural steel plates: CSA G40.21 Grade 300 W. Bolts, nuts etc. to CSA G40.21. Fastenings conform to good local practice. Make sufficiently strong and compatible with all work. Expose fasteners where pre-approved by the consultant only.

B. Bar Mill Products: Mild steel, with low carbon content, for cold bending or hot forming.

C. Miscellaneous framing (clips, brackets, plates, backing, trim): Merchant bar quality of CSA-G40.21 Grade 300W. Sizes as detailed or as required to suit fabrication.

D. Finishes: Galvanized metal primer: Cement oil base type, Pittsburg Ironhide, or Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint.

E. Stairs.

F. Ladders.

G. Bollards.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 06100 CARMACKS, YUKON ROUGH CARPENTRY APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide rough carpentry, framing, plywood sheathing and sub flooring, wood bucks, furring, cants, backing, and accessories.

B. Provide framing with dimension lumber, framing with engineered wood products, sheathing, sub-flooring and underlayment where detailed.

C. Provide rough hardware, permanent and temporary bracing, preservative treatment and fasteners.

D. Provide blocking and backing for washroom accessories, at windows and doors , fixtures, mechanical and electrical equipment and other items as required including fastenings and hardware as shown or required.

E. Provide vapor barriers and air barriers to walls, soffits and ceiling areas that will become inaccessible to other trades.

F. Provide insect screens as detailed.

G. Provide wood soffits.

H. Construct wood gazebos as indicated and specified.


A. 06190 Wood Trusses.

B. 06181 Glue Laminated Units.

C. 07469 Wood Siding.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. National Building Code, 2005.

B. N.L.G.A. Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber (latest edition).

C. CAN/CSA-O141-91 (R1999) Softwood Lumber.

D. CSA B111-1974 (R1998) Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.

E. CSA O80 Series –97 Wood Preservation.

F. CSA O121-M1978 (R1998) Douglas Fir Plywood.

G. ASTM A 307-00 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength.

H. ASTM A 325-02 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength


A. Protect materials from weather during transit to job-site.

B. Store rough carpentry under cover, on raised supports, not in contact with the ground, stack for maximum air circulation and ventilation until installed.

C. Store materials in such a way as to prevent damage, loss, or impairment of their structural or other essential properties.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL - GENERAL

A. Dimension lumber shall be graded according to the National Lumber Grade Authority No. Rule, Latest Issue for Douglas Fir.

B. Moisture content: Dimensional lumber: installed moisture content to be max. 19% exterior, 12% interior, unless otherwise specified. Protect lumber against moisture before and after installation to prevent defects.

C. Sills and wood in contact with concrete, masonry or earth: borocal site applied treatment to Douglas Fir, Spruce or Altwood plastic sill plates..

2.2 LUMBER

ITEM MATERIAL/GRADE DESCRIPTION

Studs SPF #2, Kiln Dried Conforming to NLGA 121-C S4S. Timberstrand may be substituted where required for strength.

Light Framing SPF #2 Kiln Dried Conforming to NLGA 122-B, S4S.

Joists, Rafters, Plates, Blocking

SPF #2 Kiln Dried Conforming to NLGA 124-C, S4S.

Solid Posts Douglas Fir #2 or better. Spruce #2 or better.

Planed smooth, maintain constant diameter.

Strapping and Nailing Strips

Hem Fir, Construction grade.

Nailers Douglas Fir or Spruce Treated, continuous unless indicated otherwise.

Soffits T&G nominal 1x4 SPF Spruce, Fir.

Finish: Semi-transparent stain or paint. Primer plus 2 coats.

Wood Deck Spruce, Fir for Tower Finish: Alternate price in lieu of unit pavers. Semi-transparent over 10.20 Borcol treated.

Wood Bollards Spruce 12” dia. Borocal treated below grade.


2.3 PLYWOOD

A. Plywood to conform to CSA 0141-91, 4’-0” x 8’-0” (1220 mm x 2440 mm) sheets.

ITEM MATERIAL/GRADE DESCRIPTION

Sheathing Douglas Fir, Exterior grade.

With waterproof glue. Thickness as indicated. Provide tongue and groove edges for roof sheathing, square edge for wall sheathing.

Plywood Sill Plate 2 layers of 3/4 inch Douglas Fir, exterior grade.

Borocal treated. At curved sills.

Wall Backing Fir Plywood, Exterior grade.

Thickness as indicated, preservatively treated when used as backing for windows and exterior door frames.

Electrical and Telephone Panels.

Fir Plywood, ¾ inch thick. G1S.

Paint with Intumescent paint all 6 sides prior to installation.

Subflooring ½” G1S Fir Ply. Suitable for installation of resilient flooring without telegraphing.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Exterior hardware and accessories shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Do not use stainless steel accessories adjacent to or in combination with borate treated lumber.

B. Machine bolts, washers, lag bolts, drift pins and dowels: conform to ASTM A307-94 and A325M-93.

C. Nails, spikes and staples: conform to CSA B111-1974, galvanized or stainless steel in exterior locations, high humidity areas, in treated lumber and elsewhere where liable to be exposed to corrosion.

D. Framing adhesive: 3M, Bordens or pre-approved alternate. Use to fasten plywood to joists, single layer application and where shown.

E. Vent Strip: 4 inch PVC soffit vent model 551-50 with 90° leg, by Plastic Components Inc.

F. Insect Screen: Black or silver coloured fibreglass insect screen. Colour to be selected by Consultant.

G. Metal Flashing: 0.020 aluminium, back paint with asphaltic compound where in contact with dissimilar metals and incompatible materials.

H. Connection Steel: medium structural steel, conforming to CSA G40.21-98, Grade 300W hot dipped galvanized.

I. Sill Gaskets: 25 mm (1” ) thick closed cell foam gasket full width of both sill plates.

J. Building Paper: Refer to Section 07290 Weather Resistive Barriers.

K. Wood Preservatives: Borocal site applied treatment.

2.5 PRESSURE TREATED WOOD

A. Wood noted as treated and where exposed to water constantly, as in strapping for cladding, shall be Boron-treatment.

B. Wood where located in water sensitive locations such as sill plates and at roof top curbs noted as treated, shall be treated with Boron. Boracol 20-2 or approved alternative.


C. Preservatively treat wood members and plywood backing in contact with concrete, masonry or earth below grade, including sill plates and wood enclosed in roof assemblies.

D. Apply two (2) coats of wood preservative to pressure treated wood that is cut or drilled on site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Erection methods and procedures shall meet or exceed minimum standards set out in the National Building Code. Where this specification exceeds the above standards, the specification shall govern. Perform work using skilled workers and as directed by Consultant.

B. Backing for cabinets: At wall-hung cabinets, provide heavy duty blocking and backing designed to accept weight of cabinets and contents. Coordinate with Section 05500 Metal Fabrications for shelf angles.

C. Co-ordinate and install fabricated steel components supplied under other sections.

D. Provide wood blocking as required and where detailed in stud walls at door jambs, and to receive handrails, grab bars, towel rails, and washroom accessories, and fixtures.

E. Co-ordinate and provide blocking for mechanical and electrical equipment as required.

F. Rough Framing: Make adequate provision for possible erection stresses. Set framing into correct position, arrange true to lines, levels and elevations, plumb and uniformly spaced as required. Securely brace members in place to maintain them plumb and true until permanently fixed and held in the structure.

G. Firestops: Construct from 22 ga. galvanized steel, 38 mm (1½ ") by full partition width, wood material. Construct to cut off concealed draft openings, and form an effective fire barrier.

H. Make allowance for items required for strength and against movement and deflection, such as blocking, bracing, backing, in-fill pieces, fasteners, furring, grounds, shims, bucks, dowels, bolts and washers, and other hardware, whether indicated or not, as directed by the Consultant and as required by Code. No additional funds will be paid to the Contract to provide such additional items to complete the project as intended.

3.2 EXTERIOR WALL FRAMING

A. Refer to the drawings for the sizes of studs for walls.

B. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Apply Plywood so that adjacent edges are separated by 1/16" (2 mm).

3.3 INTERIOR PARTITION FRAMING

A. Refer to drawings for the sizes of studs for interior walls. Exterior framing is a double wall construction.

B. Where fixtures of other hanging devices occur, provide blocking between studs to suit, and where required.

3.4 STRAPPING

A. Apply pressure treated strapping where indicated. Apply strapping where required to provide backing for finishes to follow. Securely nail vertically on stud lines over building paper.

B. Staple or shoot straps in place uniformly spaced, shimmed and straightened to dead flat planes. Strapping to be minimum 3/4" x 1 1/2" @ 16" (20 mm x 38 mm @ 410 mm) on centre unless otherwise required.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 06130 CARMACKS, YUKON HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1 OF 2

SECTION 06 13 23 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Provide heavy structural timber for posts and beams, joists and purlins.

.2 Provide connection hardware. Provide heavy structural timber for posts, beams, joists and purlins.


.1 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

.2 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications.

.3 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM A123/A123M-08, Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

.2 BC Building Code, 2006 Edition/National Building Code 2005.

.3 Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board (CLSAB).

.4 CAN/CSA-O80 Series-08, Wood Preservation.

.5 CAN/CSA-O86-01 Consolidation (R2006), Engineering Design in Wood.

.6 CAN/CSA-O141-05, Softwood Lumber.

.7 NLGA (National Lumber Grades Authority), Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

.8 LEED® Canada-NC Green Building Rating System (Version 1.0).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with the following Sections:

.1 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.

.2 01 33 01 Green Building Product Information Submittal Forms.

.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit data on proprietary connection devices.

.2 Submit technical data on wood preservative materials.

.3 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements including erection sequence.

.3 Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, wood species and grades, component profiles, drilled holes, fasteners, connectors, erection details. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.


.1 Lumber Grading Agency: NLGA.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Lumber Grading Rules: NLGA.

.2 Lumber: Stress group as indicated on structural drawings; Douglas Fir; architectural grade; maximum moisture content of 12 percent.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 06130 CARMACKS, YUKON HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2 OF 2 2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Connectors: Type [weldable] [Per Structural Eng] steel; [per Struc Eng] manufactured by [as specified per Structural Eng].

.2 Connectors: Specified in Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications.

.3 Post Bases: as indicated.

.4 Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws: Medium carbon steel; [unfinished] [galvanized coating; size and type to suit application.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate components in accordance with CAN/CSA O86, with joints neatly fitted, welded and ground smooth.

2.4 FINISHES

.1 Timber Surfaces Exposed to View: S4s.

.2 Prime connectors, except where cast in concrete.

.3 Galvanize Connectors:

.1 Exterior: in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M to 2.0 oz/sq.ft.

.2 Interior: in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M to 2.0 oz/sq.ft.

2.5 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT/FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT

.1 Preservative Treatment – Lumber:

.1 Treat wood associated with window installations or enclosed in masonry, concrete or other material not enclosed in heated space to CSA O80 using waterborne Borax. Boromine no longer permitted to obtain minimum net retention of 40 kg/m3 of wood.

.2 After treatment, dry material to maximum moisture content of 12%.

.3 Treat Trellis with fire retardant per manufacturer specs

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

.1 Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position.

.2 Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

.3 Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Consultant.

3.2 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

.1 Treat site-sawn ends.

.2 Brush apply two (2) coats of preservative treatment on wood/logs in contact with cementitious materials.

.3 Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.4 Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 06181 CARMACKS, YUKON GLUE LAMINATED UNITS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 06181 GLUE LAMINATED UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide glue laminated units and accessories for a complete system as indicated and specified.

B. Coordinate primer with Section 09900 Painting and Coating prior to application of primer.


A. 05500 Metal Fabrications.

B. 06200 Finish Carpentry.

C. 09900 Painting and Coating.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. CSA O 86.1 -02 Engineering Design in Wood (Limit States Design).

B. CSA O122-M89 (R1999) Structural Glued-laminated Timber.

C. CAN/CSA O177-M89 (R1998) Qualification Code for Manufacturers of Structural Glued-laminated Timber.

D. CSA O112 Series-M1977 (R1999) CSA Standards for Wood Adhesives.

E. Canadian Lumber Standards Administration Board.

F. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA), "NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber".

G. National Building Code, 2005, Yukon edition..

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with the following Sections

B. 01330 Submittal Procedures.

C. Product Data: Grading data.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit six (6) prints of shop drawings. Clearly indicate stress grade, service grade, appearance grade, shop applied finishes, shop and erection details, including cuts, holes, fastenings, camber and connection hardware.

2. Drawings to be signed and sealed by Registered Professional Engineer, (structural) registered in the Province of British Columbia or Yukon.

3. Do not fabricate units until Shop Drawings and Samples have been reviewed and approved.

E. Samples: Provide three (3) samples of beam edge, minimum 12” x 12 “ x 3” with specified finishes.



A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Glued laminated timber manufacturer to be certified by CSA Administrative Board, Structure Glued Laminated Timber Division in accordance with CAN/CSA O177-M89 to manufacture Class 1 interior and Class X exterior, softwood glued-laminated members.

B. Submit certificate in accordance with CAN/CSA O177-M89.

C. Conform to requirements of the NBC.


A. Protect materials from moisture.

B. Store materials on site to prevent deterioration or loss or impairment of structural and other essential properties.

C. Store on raised supports in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and WHMIS regulations.

D. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from site for recycling.

E. Arrange delivery of members in accordance with construction schedule to the designated delivery location.

F. Use padded, non-marring slings for handling glued-laminated members.

G. Protect corners with wood blocking.

H. Slit underside of membrane covering during storage at Site. Do not deface members.

I. Store glued-laminated timber, blocked off ground and separated with striping, so air may circulate around all faces of members.

J. Cover top and sides with opaque moisture resistant membrane if outside.

1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01505 Construction Waste Management.

B. Collect and separate for disposal all packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Conform to the following CSA Standards for sheathing and lumber:

B. Laminating Stock: Douglas Fir or SPF to CSA O122-M89. Species Group A or Group as classified in CSA 086.1-94.

C. Adhesives: To CSA O112 Series-M1977, to grade of service required in accordance with CAN/CSA O122-M89.

D. Finish of Exterior Members: Sanded finish with first shop applied Foundation coat (Step #1) and field applied finish coat (Step #2) Supernatural Protective Wood Finish System by Bio-Wash or approved alternative. Apply to manufacturer specifications.

E. Wrapping materials: weatherproof, lightproof, stain free material.

F. Dimensions and thicknesses of material shall be as indicated.


2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate glued-laminated members in accordance with CAN/CSA O122-M89 except where specified otherwise and to following classifications.

B. Stress grade: 24f-E bending grade for members primarily in positive bending. 24f-EX bending grade for members with cantilevers. 12c-E compression grade for members primarily in compression, 18t-E tension grade for members primarily in tension.

C. Service grade: interior or exterior as located on drawings.

D. Appearance grade: Quality.

E. Mark members for identification during erection, ensure that marks will be concealed in final assembly for appearance grade members. Clearly mark top surface.

F. Treat exposed ends of glued laminated members with laminated members covering exposed ends.

G. Apply stain to 6 sides of laminated members. Double coat ends of laminated members.

H. Finish as specified above.

I. Provide 6mm camber in 3000mm for beam spans greater than 15 feet (5 meters).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect Work of other sections upon which Work of this section depends. Correct defects or conditions which may impair the Work of this section.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Touch up cut or other field worked parts of pre treated materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions so full protection of materials is maintained. Prior to fabrication, check dimension relating to this section of work. Report discrepancies to Consultant.

B. Prior to site erection, examine site conditions and ensure conditions are acceptable prior to shipping.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Arrange members true to lines, levels, and elevations, plumb, and uniformly spaced.

B. Erect glued-laminated members in accordance with final reviewed shop drawings.

C. Make adequate provision for possible erection stresses. Set members level and plumb to correct positions.

D. Securely brace members and anchor in place to maintain plumb until permanently secured by finished structure.

E. Fit glued laminated members closely and accurately, without trimming, cutting or other modifications, unless approved in writing by the Consultant. Site cutting or boring of laminated members other that what is indicated on review Shop Drawings is not permitted with out Consultant’s approval.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 06200 CARMACKS, YUKON FINISH CARPENTRY APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Installation of wood doors.

B. Installation of pressed steel frames and hollow metal doors.

C. Installation of finish hardware.

D. Installation of Architectural Woodwork.

E. Supply and installation of miscellaneous interior trim.


A. Section 06400 Architectural Woodwork.

B. Section 08100 Pressed Steel Frames and Hollow Metal Doors.

C. Section 08800 Glass and Glazing

D. Section 08700 Finish Hardware


A. All items shall meet the requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada for custom grade, and this manual shall form part of this specification. If modifications to this standard occur in this specification or on the drawings, the modifications shall govern.

B. Lumber grading shall conform to NLGA, National Lumber Grade Authority latest issue.

C. Plywood, particleboard, and hardboard shall be graded in accordance with applicable CSA or CGSB standards.

D. Douglas Fir plywood grades to conform to requirements of CSA O121-M1978 G1S for opaque finish.

E. All wood framing shall be Douglas Fir or Hemlock, kiln dried. For paint finish, clear material shall be selected

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

Prepare and submit to the Consultant for review shop drawings for work supplied and installed in this Section.

Shop drawings shall show construction details of all general arrangements, locations of all service outlets, etc., typical and special installation conditions, the material being supplied and all connections, attachments, anchorage and location of exposed fastenings, as applicable..


1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store, handle, and protect materials to prevent marring of surfaces. Cover in an approved manner to protect from damage. Any disfigured or twisted fabrications will be rejected.

B. Do not install any millwork when the performance of the whole assembly would be prejudiced. Moisture equilibrium of finished products shall not be subjected to excessive changes.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Dimension lumber shall be graded according to the National Lumber Grade Authority No. Rule, Latest Issue for Douglas Fir General: All materials used in this Contract shall be of the highest quality as manufactured by nationally recognized manufacturers and of the type indicated on the drawings and in these specifications.

B. Materials (items)

ITEM MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

.1 Miscellaneous Douglas Fir or 19mm or 12.7mm trim except Hemlock or plywood thick or as detailed as specified in with solid edging K.D. clear Fir or Section 06400 on exposed edges Hemlock for painted Material and finish finish, to match to match Birch Birch for clear finish, for clear finish as noted, dimensions where noted. as detailed.

2.2 MATERIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: All fasteners shall be adequately sized to fasten architectural woodwork and carry imposed loads. Refer to details and confirm types and sizes of all typical fastener types on

PART 3 - EXAMINATION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Examine all surfaces to which the work of this section is applied, and ensure all conditions are suitable to provide a complete and satisfactory installation..

B. Commencement of work will indicate acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF MILLWORK, ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK CASEWORK

A. Install all millwork items as specified herein and in Section 06400 in locations as indicated, with all necessary grounds, blockings, furrings, bearings, and other devices, all secured and adequately supported..

B. Provide all rough hardware required for the work of this section including nails, screws, bolts, angles, and brackets.


3.3 INSTALLATION OF WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Hang all wood doors to open and close smoothly with no binding whatsoever. An even margin shall be kept between door and jamb, sufficient on all sides to allow free action of the door. Re-adjust and check all doors upon completion of the work, correcting restrictions to the free action of the door caused by rain, moisture or improper fixing of hardware of frame, etc.

B. Doors to have clearance of 3 mm jambs and at head.

C. Ensure that doors are hung to correct location in accordance with the Door Schedule. Secure doors and hardware plumb, true, and square, so that they operate without binding..

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PRESSED STEEL FRAMES AND HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. Place frames prior to construction and enclosing of walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After all construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

B. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames with clearances specified in Canadian Door and Frame, Manufacturers Association Standards, plumb, free swinging, smooth operating, and with even margins.

3.5 FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate and cooperate with the installation of finish hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fit accurately, using full complement of screws and draw up tight.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING IN WOOD AND HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND WOOD OR PRESSED STEEL FRAMES

A. Install glazing in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.

3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

A. Protect adjacent work from damage, staining, and disfigurement caused by the work of this section.

B. Promptly as the work proceeds and on completion, keep the premises clean and free from rubbish, debris, surplus materials, and equipment accumulation.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 06400 CARMACKS, YUKON ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Supply factory architectural woodwork as indicated and specified.

B. Supply plastic laminate faced base units, counter tops, and upper cabinets as indicated and specified.

C. Supply wood veneer cabinets as indicated and specified.

D. Supply clear, kiln dried, dressed, or re-sawn material exposed to view, including casework, frames, standing and running trim, and other wood-related products.

E. Provide locks with 2 keys per lock for each cabinet door and each drawer. Group keying in accordance with Owner’s instructions.

F. For installation of Architectural Woodwork, refer to Section 06200 Finish Carpentry.


A. 05500 Metal Fabrications.




E. Division 15 Mechanical.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Architectural Woodwork Institute & Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC), 2003 Edition, hereafter referred to as the QSI Manual, together with authorized additions and amendments, shall be used as a reference standard and shall form part of this project specification.

B. CAN3-A172-M79 R1996, High Pressure Paper Base, Decorative Laminates.

C. NEMA LD3-1991, High Pressure Decorative Laminates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit two (2) sets of shop drawings.

2. Show construction details of architectural woodwork, general arrangements, typical and special installation conditions, materials being supplied and connections, attachments, anchorage, and location of exposed fastenings.

3. Incorporate plans, elevations, sections, and details for architectural woodwork. Provide details indicating thicknesses, material, types and finishes, and cabinet hardware.


4. Do not fabricate work until the shop drawings have been reviewed and other related submittals and samples as required by the specifications, have been approved by the Consultant.

C. Samples:

1. Submit three (3) samples, 625 square centimetres (100 square inches) of each wood species which is to receive finish. Samples shall have specified finish applied.

2. Approved samples shall become the standard for the work.

D. Brochures: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of specialty items not manufactured by the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer as requested by the Consultant.

E. Maintenance Manual: Indicate materials and finishes used for architectural woodwork, whether shop finished or site finished and by whom. Include type and source of cabinet hardware and specialty items used under architectural woodwork and name and telephone number of closest distributor for replacement hardware. Include maintenance procedures and schedules.


A. Work of this section shall conform to Custom Grade as defined in the QSI Manual.

B. A copy of the QSI Manual shall be made readily available for reference purposes.

C. Architectural woodwork to be incorporated into the work shall meet the requirements of the QSI Manual.

D. References in these specifications to part and item numbers mean those parts and items contained within the QSI Manual.

E. Materials and installation shall be in imperial measurement as specified.

F. Mock-up: Furnish a full size mock-up of woodwork in a location determined by the Consultant. Include materials, finishes and hardware as specified. Mock-up may form part of finished work upon Consultant’s approval.

1.6 GUARANTEE

A. Furnish Owner with a two (2) year maintenance bond, to full value of architectural woodwork sub-contract, certifying architectural woodwork has been manufactured in accordance with standards incorporated in the Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standards Illustrated, (edition in effect at time of tender). Where woodwork contractor is an AWMAC member in good standing, a two (2) year AWMAC Guarantee Certificate will be issued instead of the maintenance bond.

B. The maintenance bond or Guarantee shall cover replacing, reworking, and refinishing to make good defects in architectural woodwork due to faulty workmanship or defective materials supplied by the architectural woodworker, which appear during a two (2) year period following the date of Substantial Performance of the architectural woodwork contract.


A. The Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to make certain that architectural woodwork is not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that the architectural woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content.


B. Architectural woodwork delivery, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with Section 1700 of the QSI Manual.

C. Delivered materials which are damaged in any way or do not comply with these specifications will be rejected by the Consultant, shall be removed from the job site and replaced with acceptable materials at not expense to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with specifications the following manufacturers are acceptable for the products listed.

1. Plastic Laminate: Armstrong, Nevamar, Wilsonart, Pionite, Formica, Octolam.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Use clean stock only and comply with QSI Manual.

B. Moisture Content: Lumber shall be dried to an average moisture content of 10%. Moisture equilibrium of finished products shall not be subjected to excessive changes.

C. Plywood: Formaldehyde-free. All plies veneer, minimum 7 plies for ¾” thickness; core material for plywood used with plastic laminate finish, either;

1. Poplar/Spruce-faced plywood to CSA 0153, “B” face free of voids, or

2. Birch plywood to CSA 0115, Sound Grade or better with sanded faces without defects.

D. MDF (Medium Density Fibreboard): Minimum density 769 kg/m3 (48 lb/cu. ft.) conforming to ANSI A208.2, generally 19 mm thickness. Formaldehyde free where possible.

E. Melamine: Low pressure laminate, thermally fused to particleboard substrate, meets or exceeds NEMA Standard LQ1.

F. Particleboard and fibre board shall not be used as a core material for any work of this section.

G. Colour: Colour and texture of exposed finishes to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.

H. Plastic Laminate:

1. Standard: High-Pressure Laminate to conform to CAN3-A172 and NEMA LD-3 for Class 1, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

2. Thick Stock-Self Supporting: 3.2mm (1/8") to 32 mm (1 1/4").

3. Commercial Grade: 1.5 mm thick, for horizontal surfaces.

4. General Purpose-Standard Duty: 1.06mm (.042") to 1.27mm (.050").

5. Vertical Grade/Light Duty/Liner Grade: 0.76 mm (.030").

6. Post Formed: 0.035 mm thick to CAN 3 A172 Type 2

I. Interior Standing and Running Trim:

1. Quality Standard: Comply with AWMAC Section 300.


2. Grade: Custom.

J. Hardboard: Manufactured and graded in accordance with CGSB Standard 11-GP-3M, Type 2 tempered.

1. Backing Sheets: By same manufacturer as facing sheets, to manufacturer’s standard, thickness to suit exposed surface laminate grade in accordance with QSI.

2. Adhesives: Comply with QSI standards, and as recommended by materials manufacturers.

3. Hardwood Plywood: Manufactured and graded in accordance with CSA 0115. Veneer core. MDF and particle board core is not permitted where plywood is indicated.

K. Stainless Steel: 3 mm thick or as indicated, satin finish stainless steel manufactured in accordance with A480M-03b Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

L. Peg Board: Tempered hardboard (masonite) 3.15 mm thick, conforming to CGSB 11-G-3B, Type 2 and perforated hardboard 3.15 mm thick with 5 mm holes at 25 mm o.c.

2.3 CASEWORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Coordinate with millwork drawings.

B. QSI Quality Grade: Custom.

C. Casework Construction: Conform to Section 400 QSI.

D. Exposed Parts:

1. Core: MDF.

2. Face Species and Cut: Maple, rotary cut, 19 mm thick.

3. Edge Trim: Solid Maple.

E. Semi-Exposed Parts:

1. Core: MDF.

2. Face and Back: Melamine.

3. Edge: PVC tape.

4. Shelves: Plastic Laminate, vertical grade all 6 sides.

2.4 CASEWORK FOR LAMINATE FINISH

A. QSI Quality Grade: Custom.

B. Casework Construction: Conform to Section 400 QSI.

C. Exposed Parts:

1. Core: Plywood

2. Face: Plastic laminate.

3. Grade:


a. Countertops: General purpose grade, standard duty 1.06 mm thick.

b. Vertical Surfaces: Vertical grade, 0.76 mm thick.

D. Semi-Exposed Parts:

1. Core: Plywood.

2. Laminate Finish: Liner grade.

3. Colour: Consultant to select.

E. Edge: Plastic Laminate.

2.5 COUNTERTOPS AND BACKSPLASHES FOR LAMINATE FINISH

A. Exposed Parts:

1. Core: Exterior grade plywood.

2. Face: Plastic laminate.

3. Grades:

a. Countertops: General purpose grade, standard duty 1.06 mm thick.

b. Vertical Surfaces: Vertical grade, 0.76 mm thick.

4. Edge: ½ inch by 1 ½ inch solid maple.

B. Semi-Exposed Parts:

1. Core: MDF.

2. Laminate Finish: Liner grade.

3. Edge: Plastic Laminate.

C. Backsplash shall conform to QSI Manual square top for self edge as detailed on page 201 of QSI.

D. Laminate: Standard grade.

2.6 COUNTERTOPS FOR STAINLESS STEEL FINISH – KITCHEN SERVICE COUNTER

A. Exposed Parts:

1. Core: Exterior grade plywood, thickness as indicated.

2. Face: 3 mm thick stainless steel, No. 4 satin finish.

3. Edge: Self edged.

2.7 WOOD WALL PANELING

A. Exposed Parts:

1. Core: !/4 inch thick apple plywood.

2. Face: Eastern white maple, rotary cut.


3. Fasteners: Stainless steel, 1/4 inch diameter heads.

4. Backer: At gaps in panels, paint supporting structure black.

5. Edge: Exposed edge of apple ply.

2.8 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM

A. Public Corridors and Offices:

1. Casings – Interior Doors and Windows: Painted MDF, profile as indicated.

2. Baseboards: Painted MDF, profile as indicated.

B. Council Chambers:

1. Casings – Interior Doors and Windows: Solid eastern white maple, profile as indicated.

2. Baseboards: Solid eastern white maple, profile as indicated.

3. Bull Nose on Desk tops: Solid eastern white maple, profile as indicated.

4. Cap on Pony Wall: Solid eastern white maple, profile as indicated.

2.9 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Colour Matching: Wood finishes require colour matching to reference material. Obtain Consultant’s approval of samples before manufacturing woodwork.

B. Factory finish to greatest extent possible.

C. Apply finishes in accordance with Section 1500 of QSI.

D. Field Touch-Up: Fill and touch-up exposed job-made nail and screw holes, refinish raw surfaces resulting from job fitting, repair of job-inflicted scratches and mars, and final cleaning up of finished surfaces.

2.10 HARDWARE

A. Adjustable Shelf Hardware: Lengths to suit, flush mounting, steel, bright nickel finish. Manufacture: Roll-It #120 with clips #107. Screw shelves to shelf supports.

B. Magnetic Door Catches: For cabinet doors. Product: Ives #325 or Epco #590.

C. Concealed Cabinet Door Hinges: Self-closing, 170 degree swing. Use 1 pair for doors up to 800 mm high. Use 1 ½ pair for doors above 800 mm high. Product: Blum #7M555.

D. Drawer Glides: 100 lb load rating per pair. Chrome finish. Ball bearing type. Lengths to suit. Deep drawers and file drawer slides to be Accuride series 270 439, lengths as required, full length extension. Product: Accuride C 3005 or B5230E.

E. Door and Drawer Pulls: Satin chrome “D” pulls, spacing 96 mm, handle diameter 10 mm, length 100 mm, height 38 mm.

F. Door & Drawer Locks: Provide locks for each door and drawer. Type: Corbin 0738 and 0737 x KD x MK, pin tumbler type x C26D finish. Supply complete with #73 strike plates. At pairs of doors, fix one leaf with inside spring loaded elbow catches.

G. Cabinet Door and Drawer Mutes: Clear vinyl door and drawer mutes for cabinets ½: or 3/8” dia self adhesive bumper. Use min 3 per door leaf and 2 per drawer.


H. Coat Rod & Support: Roll-It 1221 c/w 1225 and 1226 end brackets. 1” OD x 14 gauge chrome rod complete with matching end supports. Lengths to suit.

I. Wire Access Grommets: Chrome plate steel polyethylene, beige colour, and computer lines. Type: by HOC, Richmond, BC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Examine areas to receive architectural woodwork with Installer present.

B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions or conditions that could adversely affect installation.

C. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure job conditions for installation of architectural woodwork are as specified under Section 1700 of QSI.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 06200 Finish Carpentry.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 07210 CARMACKS, YUKON BUILDING INSULATION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Provide thermal and acoustic insulation and accessories as indicated and specified.

.2 Provide interior insulation including rigid, semi-rigid, mineral wool batt, and accessories for a complete installation.

Provide exterior insulation for areas below slab, under walkways, and at foundation walls. Provide building insulation (formaldehyde free) with accessories for a complete installation as indicated and specified.

.3 Provide glass fibre batt insulation at exterior walls and within exterior walls at roof parapets, as indicated.

.4 Provide rigid insulation polystyrene insulation at perimeter foundation walls, trenches and as indicated.

.5 Provide rigid or batt insulation indicated and not included under other sections.

.6 Provide polyethylene vapour barrier on inside face rigid insulation at inside of exterior walls (outside wall), including vapour barrier tape and air barrier sealant. Note all exterior walls are strapped with 2 x3 for an additional layer of insulation – VB on inside of outside wall.

.7 Provide acoustic fiberglass batt insulation at interior partition walls, at partitions between offices, plumbing walls and floor to ceiling assemblies.

.8 Refer to Section 07500 for Roofing Insulation.


.1 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry.

.2 07 25 00 Weather Barriers.

.3 07 84 00 Firestopping.

.4 07 92 00 Joint Sealants.

.5 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM C208-08, Cellulosic Fibre, Insulating Board.

.2 ASTM C552-07, Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.

.3 ASTM C578-08, Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

.4 ASTM C591-08, Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation.

.5 ASTM C612-04e1, Mineral Fibre Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

.6 ASTM C1126-04, Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation.

.7 ASTM C1289-07, Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.

.8 ASTM E84-08a, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.9 ASTM E96/E96M-05, Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

.10 National Building Code, 2005 Edition.

.11 CAN/ULC S102-07, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 07210 CARMACKS, YUKON BUILDING INSULATION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2 OF 5 .12 CAN/ULC S701-05, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.

.13 CAN/ULC S702-97, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.

.14 CAN/ULC S704-03, Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Boards, Faced.

.15 CAN/ULC S706-02, Wood Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings.

.16 LEED® Canada-NC Green Building Rating System (Version 1.0).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with the following Sections:

.1 01 11 01 Special Project Procedures – LEED Certification.

.2 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation.

.3 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.

.4 01 33 01 Green Building Product Information Submittal Forms.

.5 01 33 29 Sustainable Design Reporting.

.6 01 35 43 Environmental Procedures.

.7 01 35 46 Low Emitting Materials-Emission Limits Tables.

.2 Product Data: Submit 3 copies of the following:

.1 Published "R" value for thicknesses of insulation, product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations, for each product indicated.

.2 Manufacturer’s Instructions: Indicate installation requirements for each product specified including special procedures, and conditions requiring special attention.


.1 Mockup:

.1 Provide mock-up of materials of this section and materials of related Sections, in location and size as directed by Consultant.

.2 Mock-up may remain as part of the finished Work upon approval by Consultant.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS/SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Subject to compliance with specifications the following manufacturers are acceptable:

.1 Dow Chemical Company.

.2 Johns Manville.

.3 Owens Corning. .4 Or approved alternative.

2.2 GENERAL

.1 Thermal Resistance Values: Comply with ASTM C518. Thermal resistance values are shown on Drawings.

.2 Dimensional Stability: Linear shrinkage less than 0.1%.

2.3 BATT INSULATION

.1 Unfaced Batt Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I.

.1 Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84.


.2 Flamespread: Maximum 25.

.3 Smoke Developed: Maximum 50.

.4 Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E136, non-combustible. .2 Where used with steel stud assemblies, provide batts wide enough to fill cavities from web of one

stud to web of adjacent stud.

2.4 SEMI-RIGID INSULATION – DUCT LINER

.1 Semi-Rigid Insulation: Conforming to ASTM C665 and ASTM C518 Bonded board, glass fibres coated with black-pigmented fire-resistant coating on air stream side. Thicknesses as indicated.

.1 Surface Burning Characteristics: ULC 723.

.2 Flame Spread: 25.

.3 Smoke Developed: 50.

.4 Fibreglass Duct Liner Board, by Owens Corning or approved alternate.

2.5 RIGID INSULATION

.1 Rigid Insulation: Extruded closed cell polystyrene Insulation conforming to CAN/ULC S701, Type 4 thickness as indicated.

.2 Acceptable Products:

.1 Dow Square Edge, by DOW Chemical Co.

.2 Formular 250, by Owens Corning.

.3 Or approved alternative.

.3 Thermal Resistance: 5.0 per inch aged R-Value at 23°C (75°F), ASTM C518.

.4 Water Absorption: Maximum 0.1% by volume, ASTM C272.

.5 Water Vapour Permeance: 1.1 perms, ASTM E96.

.6 Fire Rating: ULC Class A, tested ASTM E84.

.7 Flame Spread: 5.

.8 Smoke Developed: 165.

.9 Compressive Strength: 30 psi, ASTM D1621 unless indicated otherwise.

.1 Exterior Walls: Cavity Mate 30 psi.

.2 Below Slabs on Grade: Styrofoam SM 30 psi.

2.6 MINERAL WOOL INSULATION

.1 Rock Wool Insulation / Mineral Wool: Conforming to CAN/CGSB 51.10 Type 2, Class 4 and CAN/ULC S102.

.1 Semi-Rigid Board: RXL 40 by Roxul or approved alternative.

.2 Masonry Locations: Cavity Rock by Roxul or approved alternative.

.3 Curtain Wall Locations: Curtain Rock 40 by Roxul or approved alternative.

.4 Steel Stud Locations: Roxul Plus by Roxul or approved alternative.

2.7 CEMENT FACED RIGID INSULATION

.1 Cement Faced Rigid Insulation: Pre-finished, exterior, tongue and groove perimeter foundation polystyrene insulation board, with factory applied 9 mm (3/8”) thick latex modified concrete facing conforming to CAN/ULC S102 and CAN/ULC S701, Type 4. Parge exposed corners. Overall Thickness: 3 inches (75 mm) unless indicated otherwise.

.1 Acceptable Product: Styrofoam CT by Dow Chemical Co, or approved alternative.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 07210 CARMACKS, YUKON BUILDING INSULATION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 4 OF 5 2.8 ACCESSORIES

.1 Adhesives: Conforming to CGSB 71-GP-24M: Provide only adhesive compatible with polystyrene.

.1 Prime concrete surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

.2 Firestopping: Refer to Section 07 84 00 Firestopping.

.3 Insulation Hangers: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh, or approved alternative.

.4 Miscellaneous: Accessory materials, methods, fasteners, tools, and equipment required for completion of insulation work.

.5 Nails and Staples: Corrosion resistant steel wire of type and size to suit installation.

.6 Rock Wool: As specified in Section 07 84 00 Firestopping.

.7 Spray Foam Insulation: Froth Pak, by Insta-Foam Products Inc. or approved alternative.

.8 Vapour Barrier: Provide as specified in Section 07 25 00 Weather Barriers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine areas to receive insulation with Installer present. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Ensure substrates and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.

.2 Ensure plumbing, heating, ventilation and electrical services in partitions to receive insulation have been reviewed and approved by Consultant and authority having jurisdiction.

.3 Review wall schedule for locations of insulation and R-Value requirements.


.1 Install in accordance with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated, code requirements, and as indicated.

.2 Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated.

.3 Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

.4 Ensure protection boxes for recessed incandescent fixtures are installed prior to insulation installation. Maintain 1 inch (25 mm) clearance around recessed fans.

.5 Rigid Insulation at Face of Concrete Foundation Walls:

.1 Verify walls to be plumb, true, clean, and even in plane before beginning installation. Cut mortar joints flush with masonry face. Remove fins and projections from concrete.

.2 Carefully cut and fit rigid insulation to accommodate doors, windows, electrical conduit and outlets. Begin at one corner with each board tightly butted to form uninterrupted surface using largest size board available.

.3 Install insulation furring strips at 16 inches (400 mm) on center maximum and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.4 Pneumatically drive mechanical fasteners through each prepared hole in furring strips at 10 inches (250 mm) on center maximum through insulation into substrate and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

.5 Position additional furring strips around doors, windows, corners, and as necessary to provide firm attachment for gypsum board finish.

.6 Leave ready for installation of vapour barrier.

.6 Batt Insulation:


.1 Thermal and Acoustic: Install batt insulation, where indicated, fitting tightly between furring and studs. Ensure insulation is well packed around blocking, backing, and mechanical and electrical wall services.

.2 Install impaling strips to hold acoustic insulation in place for stud thickness which exceeds insulation thickness.

.3 Where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2400 mm) support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges to flanges of metal studs.

.7 Insulation Hangers:

.1 Provide wire mesh support between roof/ceiling framing members where applicable to hold insulation in place.

.8 Do not enclose insulation until it has been reviewed by Consultant.

3.4 INSTALLATION - VAPOUR BARRIER

.1 Place vapour barrier on warm side of insulation.

.2 Before installing vapour retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapour retarders with vapour-retarder tape according to vapour-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapour-retarder tape. Locate joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

.3 Firmly attach vapour retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapour-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapour-retarder manufacturer.

.4 Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapour retarders with vapour-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapour retarder.

.5 Repair tears or punctures in vapour retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapour-retarder tape or another layer of vapour retarder.

3.5 INSTALLATION - VAPOUR BARRIER UNDERSLABS

.1 Seal off ground area occupied by building to prevent migration of moisture and vapours from ground to building spaces.

.2 Lay membrane in full widths and lengths over gravel base coarse and lap joints a minimum of 20 inches (0.5 m).

.3 Carry membrane up vertical walls to top of slab, where membrane abuts vertical surfaces.

.4 Seal laps, joints and service penetrations.

.5 Inspect membrane before covering and make repairs immediately. Repair misaligned or inadequately lapped seams, punctures or other damage with a patch of membrane extending 12 inches (300 mm) in all directions from edge of damaged area. Seal edges of patch.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

.1 At completion of installation remove excess material and debris from site.

.2 Where cement insulation is used parge exposed edges.

.3 Clean drippage or spills of sealant, mastic or primers and leave in clean, neat condition.

.4 Repair defects to this installation and defects to other Work caused by this installation.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 07215 CARMACKS, YUKON SPRAYED INSULATION APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 07215 SPRAYED INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide spray applied polyurethane foam insulation to substrates and as indicated, in thickness required to achieved indicated R values required and as specified.



1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C518-02, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

B. ASTM D1622-98, Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

C. ASTM E136-99e1, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C.

D. ASTM E736-00, Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members.

E. CAN/CGSB 51.23-92, Spray-Applied Rigid Polyurethane Cellular Plastic Thermal Insulation.

F. CAN/CGSB 51.39-92, Spray Application of Rigid Polyurethane Cellular Plastic Thermal Insulation for Building Construction.

G. CAN/ULC-S102-03, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

H. CAN/ULC S705.1-01, Thermal Insulation - Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Material-Specification.

I. CAN/ULC S705.2-98, Thermal Insulation - Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Installer’s Responsibilities - Specification.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each product specified, including installation requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicating extent of insulated areas and thickness required to achieve indicated R values.

D. Samples: Three 8” x 10” samples of spray insulation on sample panel.


A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by sprayed thermal insulation manufacturer and been in business for a minimum period of (3) years.

1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original, labelled and unopened packages.

B. Store materials in a warm, dry place on concrete floor or wood platform.



A. Environmental Conditions:

1. Perform Work of this Section under conditions stated in manufacturer's printed application instructions.

2. Arrange for natural ventilation to properly dry insulation material during and subsequent to its application.

B. Patching:

1. Patching and repairing of sprayed thermal insulation due to cutting by other trades performed under this Section shall be paid for by the trade performing cutting.

C. Manufacturer’s Representative: Allow manufacturer's representative full access to the site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Foam Insulation/Air-Barrier System: Sprayed-in-place polyurethane to CAN/ULC S705.1 Approved product: Icynene (medium density) or approved alternative.

B. Sprayed-in-place insulation shall not contain asbestos, free crystalline silica or combustible fibers, and shall exhibit the following physical properties:

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: CAN/ULC-S102.

2. Flame Spread: FSC75-15 or GWL-15.

3. Fuel Contributed: FSC75-15 or GWL-15.

4. Smoke Density Developed: FSC75-0 or GWL-0.

5. Non-Combustibility: ASTM E136.

6. Thermal Conductivity: ASTM C518.

7. 5 Year Aged Thermal Resistance (min) 1.05 RSI/ per inch (25mm) 2x6 wall = approx R28.

C. Primers: As recommended by spray insulation manufacturer, mixed with fresh, clean water to the exact proportions recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and conditions to which the Work of this Section is to be applied with Installer present. Ensure conditions are adequate to provide a satisfactory application of specified materials.

B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Start of Work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify bond requirements and compatibility of surfaces to receive thermal insulation materials.


B. Clean dust, loose dirt, or foreign material from surfaces to which the Work is to be applied, and which could otherwise create a false bond.

C. Ensure ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interfere with application of thermal insulation are not positioned until thermal insulation work is completed.

D. Protection:

1. Adequately protect adjacent surfaces from being sprayed by means of drop cloths, or polyethylene sheets, with necessary taping.

2. Close off and seal duct work in areas where sprayed insulation is being applied.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and CAN/ULC S705.2.

B. Mix and apply thermal insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Spray apply insulation to cavities as indicated on reviewed shop drawings.

D. Apply insulation in sufficient thickness to achieve required thermal value.

E. Ensure that insulation provides continuity of air barrier at gaps in substrates and framing.

F. Board tamp sprayed insulation surface and apply insulation adhesive to seal tamped insulation surfaces.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove sprayed thermal insulation from surfaces not indicated or specified to be insulated.

B. Broom clean working areas affected by the Work of this Section.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07216 SPRAYED INSULATION

PART 1 -GENERAL Icynene or Equivalent

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contractual

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Medium-density, 100 percent water blown polyurethane foam

insulation with recycled content.

B. Related Sections:

C. Coordinate mechanical ventilation and fresh air supply with Mechanical sections

and ASHRAE Guidelines for optimum indoor air quality.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) 1. ASTM C 518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission

Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus 2. ASTM D 2842: Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics 3. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials 4. ASTM E 96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 5. ASTM E 283: Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage

Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

6. ASTM E 2178: Standard Test Method for Determining Air Permeance of Building Materials content (in weight) is expressed as a recycled fraction, and that is multiplied by the cost of the material or assembly to determine the contribution to the cost thresholds.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Product produced in an ISO 9001 registered

factory.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Single source product from one manufacturer.

C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Icynene Licensed Dealer (applicator) who has

been trained and certified by Icynene.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials specified as determined

by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate

markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84

E. Toxicity/Hazardous Materials Provide products that contain no urea-formaldehyde


Products and equipment requiring or using CFCs, HCFCs, or HFCs during the manufacturing or application process will not be permitted Provide products that contain no PBDEs Provide products that are “Low-emitting”

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for handling and protection prior

to and during installation.

B. Store both components in a temperature controlled area between 60 and 90

degrees F. Do not allow product to freeze.

C. Use only those components that are supplied by the Manufacturer.


A. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation

and concealment.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s standard limited lifetime warranty.

B. Refer to www.Icynene.com for full warranty terms. For icynene PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Polyurethane Spray Foam Insulation: ICYNENE MD-R-200TM

by Icynene Inc. (Design Standard) or Equivalent

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with

referenced standards.

B. ICYNENE MD-R-200TM

Spray Foam Insulation: Medium-density, water-blown,

with recycled content, conforming to the following:

1. Thermal Resistance (R-Value/inch @75 deg F): ASTM C 518; 5.1 hr/sq

ft/degree F/BTU

Average insulation contribution in stud wall:

1) 2in. x 4in .=R18

2) 2in. x 6in. =R28

2. Air Permeance (for 2 inches of material): ASTM E 283; <0.02 L/S.m2

@75 Pa

3. Air Permeance (for 2 inches of material): ASTM E 2178: < 0.02 L/s.m2

@ 75 Pa

4. Water Vapor Transmission (for 3 inches of material): ASTM E 96; 1.3 perms

5. Water Absorption: 1.7% per ASTM D2842

6. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E 84 Flame Spread: Less than 20 Smoke Development: Less than 400


C. Product Description: 1 Collaborative for High-Performance Schools (CHPS) “Low-emitting material” per CA 01350 Criteria 2 Effective “breathing,” (Vapor Permeable), air barrier material that can maintain the air barrier characteristic for the life of the building.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Product produced in an ISO 9001 registered factory.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, under which work is to be performed. Do not

proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Review placement area to determine final location will not be within 3

inches of any heat source where the temperature will exceed 180 deg F per

ASTM C 411 or in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

A. Site mix liquid components manufactured by Icynene and supplied by

Independent Icynene Licensed Dealer.

B. Apply insulation to substrates in compliance with manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates and cavities of loose materials capable of interfering with insulation

placement.

3.3 APPLICATION

3.4 Apply insulation to produce thickness required for indicated R Value. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior

walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of

insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Any repairs must be effected by an Icynene Licensed Dealer.

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures,

physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation

is subject to abuse.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 07290 CARMACKS, YUKON WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 07290

WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide building paper and membrane flashing as indicated and specified.

B. Provide Air Barrier with accessories for a complete system as indicated and specified.



B. 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

C. 08210 Wood Doors.

D. 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.

E. 08525 Vinyl Windows.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D779-03, Standard Test Method for Water Resistance of Paper, Paperboard, and Other Sheet Materials by the Dry Indicator Method.

B. ASTM D828-97(2002), Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Paper and Paperboard Using Constant-Rate-of-Elongation Apparatus.

C. ASTM D882-02, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting.

D. ASTM D1117-01, Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics

E. ASTM E84-03b, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

F. ASTM E96-00e1, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

G. ASTM E1677-95(2000), Standard Specification for an Air Retarder (AR) Material or System for Low-Rise Framed Building Walls.

H. CAN/CGSB 51.34-M86 R 11/88, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction.

I. TAPPI T410 om-02, Grammage of Paper and Paperboard (wt./unit area), Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit three copies of manufacturer's specification and installation instructions for each type of vapour and air barrier material specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.


A. Use experienced Installers.

B. Perform cut and pull test with Consultant present at Consultant’s identified locations. Consultant to review procedures.


C. Mock Up: Mock up 10 feet of air barrier system and one window and one door with membrane flashing. Include metal flashing and specified sealants in mock. Mock may remain as part of finished work upon Consultant’s approval.


A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or packages with labels intact and legible.

C. Label materials with manufacturer’s name, product, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

E. Immediately remove damaged material from jobsite.

F. Protect materials from damage during transit, handling, storage, and installation. Place materials on pallets or raised platforms and fully protect from moisture.

G. Store shipping cartons flat in a cool, shaded area. Inside storage (building or trailer) is preferred for the cartons containing rolls of sheet membrane and flashing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Flexible Membrane Flashing: 40 mil self-adhesive SBS modified asphalt on polyethylene film. Acceptable products: Blueskin SA, by Henry Bakor, or approved equivalent.

1. Locations: sills at wall openings, roof parapet caps, through wall flashing at masonry and as indicated.

2. Through walls: Blueskin TWF by Bakor or approved alternative.

3. Parapet Caps, Roof Areas: Blueskin PE200 HT or approved alternative.

B. Vapour Retarder: 0.152 mm thick (6 mil) polyethylene conforming to CGSB 51.34 M86.

C. Air Barrier: Spun polyolefin. Breathable sheet product, Tyvek Commercial Wrap, by Dupont.

Properties Test Method Rating

Air Penetration Gurley Hill (TAPPI T-460) (sec/100 cc)

1500

Air Penetration ASTM E-1677 Type I

Water Vapor Transmission

ASTM E-96 Method B

g/m2-24 hours) (perms)

200

28

Water Penetration Resistance

AATCC-127 (cm) >280

Basis Weight TAPPI T-410 (oz/yd2) 2.7

Breaking Strength

ASTM D-882 Method A (lbs/in) MD/CD

38/35

Tear Resistance (Trapezoid)

ASTM D-117 (lbs) MD/CD 12/10


Surface Burning Characteristics

ASTM E-84-97a (lbs)

Flame Spread Index

Smoke Developed Value

Class A

Class A

1. Air Barrier Membrane Flashing: Self-adhesive, spun polyolyfin film with butyl backing, self-sealing. Tyvek Flexwrap, by Dupont.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Air Barrier Gaskets: Foam gaskets or polyethylene pans at locations of penetration of electrical boxes and fixtures at exterior walls.

B. Primer: High tack SBS rubber based primer to CGSB 37-GP 9Ma and membrane flashing manufacturer’s recommendation.

C. Sealant: Provide sealants as specified: Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

D. Termination Bars: 18 gauge, G200 galvanized steel, 20 mm wide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and the conditions under which the moisture barrier work is to be performed with Installer present. Correct unsatisfactory conditions including: incompatibility with adjacent materials.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure weather conditions will meet manufacture’s requirements for installation, including forecasting requirements.

B. Ensure new concrete is cured for a minimum of 14 days and is dry before membranes are applied.

C. Ensure surfaces are sound, dry, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants. Fill spalled areas in substrate to provide an even plane.

D. Ensure lumber and plywood have a moisture content of 19% or less prior to installation of self adhered membranes.

3.3 INSTALLATION – MEMBRANE FLASHING

A. Attach flashing membranes, adhesive and sealants in compliance with contract documents and manufacturer’s instructions. Prime substrates and surfaces in compliance with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Primer: For Membrane Flashing.

1. Apply primer for self-adhering membranes at rate recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Apply primer to areas to receive transition sheet or through-wall flashing membrane as indicated in drawings by roller or spray and allow minimum 30 minute open time.

3. Apply primer to underlying substrates including underlying layers of self adhesive membrane.

4. Re prime surfaces that have not received membrane flashing during the same working day they are primed.


5. Ensure primer is dry prior to application of membrane.

C. Membrane Flashing:

1. Roll out sheets. Discard wrinkled or bubbled membrane.

2. Align and position membrane flashing, remove protective film and press firmly into place with a mechanical roller to provide full contact bond. Use heat gun as required to achieve continuous bond.

3. Ensure minimum 50 mm overlap at end and side laps unless indicated otherwise by details or manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Promptly roll laps and membrane with a counter top roller to effect seal.

5. Prestrip membrane (and sheathing paper) as required to ensure shingle fashion laps at tie-ins.

6. Tie-in to window frames, aluminum screens, hollow metal doorframes, spandrel panels, roofing system and at the interface of dissimilar materials as indicated in drawings.

7. Do not stretch flashings. Apply in such a manner to eliminate stress within the flashing material.

8. Apply mastic to exposed edges.

9. Ensure membrane is fully supported, do not permit bridge gaps of more than 6 mm.

10. Patch deficient areas with membrane extending 150 mm minimum in all direction from affected area. Seal top and sides of patch with mastic.

11. Extend membrane onto items protruding to or penetrating assembly and seal termination with mastic.

12. Ensure no membrane or membrane accessories extend to future exterior sealant locations or on finished surfaces. Clean any affected areas as required.

13. Install termination bars onto membrane to continuously secure as indicated and directed by Consultant. Fasten as required to eliminate bowing of termination bar (minimum 8” on center).

14. Seal leading edge with mastic at the end of each day’s work.

3.4 INSTALLATION – AIR BARRIER

A. Apply air barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and code requirements.

B. Coordinate installation with installation of Flexible Membrane Flashing.

C. Preparation: Ensure surfaces to receive barrier are smooth, clean, dry and in good condition. Remove moisture, grease, machine oil or other foreign material.

D. Attach air barrier to wood, sheathing board with slater’s head or plastic capped galvanized nails or galvanized staples as recommended by air barrier manufacturer.

E. Install sufficient fasteners to secure air barrier to wall and resist a limited period of wind forces prior to application of exterior wall covering. Ensure air barrier shall be free from holes and breaks other than those created by fasteners.

F. Apply air barrier horizontally, with upper layer lapped over lower layer not less than 6 inches, shingle style. Lap vertical joints lapped not less than 6 inches. Flash wall penetrations with specified membrane flashing materials providing a water shedding system.


G. Inspection and Repair:

1. Inspect air barrier thoroughly before covering and make corrections immediately.

2. Repair misaligned or inadequately lapped seams, punctures or other damage with a patch of air barrier extending 152 mm (6") in each directions from edge of damaged area. Seal edges of patch with mastic recommended by air barrier manufacturer.

3. Repair punctures or other damage as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Field Quality Control: Membrane manufacturer shall provide on-the-job inspections, technical assistance and membrane application guidance as may be necessary to complete the air barrier application.

3.5 INSTALLATION – VAPOUR RETARDER

A. Lap joints and seal continuously as indicated.

B. Seal exterior penetrations through barriers at locations such as plumbing, electrical, and HVAC penetrations.

C. Gasket and make weather tight electrical boxes and fixtures on exterior walls. Polyethylene pans are acceptable at boxes.


A. Inspection: Notify Consultant when mock up is complete so as to allow for review prior to installing of balance of membrane flashing.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect Finished Work. Flexible membrane flashings are not designed for permanent exposure. Cover systems as soon as possible after installation.

3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean drippage or spills of sealants, mastics or primers and leave work in clean, neat condition.

B. At end of each day’s work, provide protection for completed work and materials out of storage.

C. Repair or replace defects to this installation or defects to other work caused by this installation.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 07400 CARMACKS, YUKON METAL ROOFING APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 07400 METAL ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide pre-finished metal standing seam roofing with waterproof underlayment, fasteners, sealants, closures and accessories for a complete waterproof installation as indicated and specified.

B. Install snow guards and roofing accessories as indicated on drawings and specified at all unprotected entrances.


A. 06100 Rough Carpentry

B. 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Conform to the following referenced standards.

B. ASTM A653/653M – Sheet Steel Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, minimum grade 33, with a design thickness of 26 gage (56mm) or greater and a minimum zinc coating designation Z 275.

C. ASTM B117-90 - Test Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.

D. CAN/CSA-S136-M89 - Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.


A. Design Standards: The strength of specified profile galvanized steel shall be limited by CAN/CSA-S136-M89 Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.

B. Conform to Guarantee Standard of the RCABC, as published in the “RCABC Roofing Practices Manual” for a five (5) year Guarantee.

C. Employ skilled applicators certified by the Yukon Territory or Provincial Apprenticeship Board as being „enrolled in” or “having completed” appropriate training in the fabrication and installation of metal roofing.

D. Inspection Agency: An independent Testing Agency will be retained and paid for by the Owner to perform roof inspections. Cooperate fully with Owner‟s inspection agency.


A. Design Requirements:

1. Loading: CAN/CSA -S136-M94

2. Continuity: Entire sheet or panel shall be fabricated to span over 3 supports or more.

a. Deflection of the roof system under live load shall not exceed L/360.

b. Conforms to the following standards

1) ASTM E331 Water Infiltration 2) ASTM E283 Air Tightness


3) UL 90 – Wind Uplift B. Design complete roof system to withstand dead loads, snow loads and build-up and wind loads

including uplift calculated in accordance with National Building Code and applicable local regulations.

C. Metal roofing system shall include waterproofing membrane which drains to exterior. Fastening through this membrane shall be sealed to ensure a watertight system to true intent of contract.

D. Roofing materials and flashing shall not be in contact with protected membrane roofing.

E. Design roof to allow adequate expansion and contraction in accordance with manufacturer‟s recommendations.

F. Design anchorage, method of fastening, frequency of clips and spacing and number of fasteners for fixing roofing materials to meet loading requirements, including but not limited to suction loads. Panel‟s width dimensions and thickness details shall be in accordance with roofing manufacturer‟s recommendations to avoid fluttering and subsequent cracking.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer‟s installation and maintenance instructions. Provide one set of Material Safety Data Sheets prior to commencement of Work, for review and posting on job site.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's standard details of components, flashings and accessories as applicable. Submit 3 copies of detailed roof plans indicating location of joints and seams.

D. Erection drawings: submit for approval before proceeding with installation.

E. Samples: Submit 3 samples of roofing, indicating colour, typical seaming, and underlayment.

F. Record of Installation: At completion of installation provide Owner with 2 copies of Record of Installation. Record shall include guaranties, copies of inspection reports, and roof maintenance guide.


A. Installer Qualifications: Roofing subcontractor shall have minimum 5 years experience in roofing of this type. Employ skilled applicators certified by apprenticeship Board asw having appropriate training in the fabrication and installation of metal roofing.

B. Mock Up: Mock up a 10 meter area of underlayment, roofing and accessories prior to installation of metal roofing. Mock up may remain as part of final installation upon Consultant and Owner‟s roofing Inspection Agency‟s approval.

C. The roofing sub contractor shall conform to RCABC Guarantee standards or equivalent Testing service certification for best roofing practices.


A. Deliver materials to Site only when work of this Section can be started.

B. Take care during storage and transportation to ensure that no water is allowed to penetrate between stacked panels, strips or other profiles or coils.

C. Should storage on Site become necessary follow manufacturer's recommendations.


D. Deliver equipment to Site only when work of this Section can be started, and store where designated.

E. Do not order material until samples (and colour ) have been submitted and approved.

1.9 MAINTENANCE BOND

A. Provide a two (2) year Maintenance Bond for the full value of the roofing installation with an option to renew for up to three (3) years. Submit a draft copy of the bond prior to installation in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. At completion of the work submit executed Bond in accordance with Section 01770 Closeout Procedures. Include cost of bond in Contract Price.

B. Inspections: Inspection of the roof will be performed by an independent inspector 23 months from the date of Substantial Performance. Attend the roofing inspection 23 months from the date of Substantial Performance. Correct deficiencies identified by Owner‟s roofing inspector prior to expiration of the Bond.

1.10 GUARANTY

A. Manufacturer‟s Guaranty: Provide manufacturer‟s standard material guaranty for twenty-five (25) years minimum.

B. Installer‟s Guaranty: Provide installer‟s five (5) year written company guaranty based on RCABC or equiv standards.

1.11 INSPECTION AND WARRANTY

A. Upon completion of work, this Contractor shall warrant that metal flashings will stay in place and remain leak proof in accordance with the General Conditions, but for five years.

B. An independent Testing Agency acceptable to owner, will be retained by Contractor to perform roof inspections. Inspection costs for the guarantee will be paid for contractor and included in this contract.

C. Upon completion of work, this Contractor shall furnish Owners with a 2 year Maintenance Bond for the work of this section.

1.12 COMPATIBILITY

A. Compatibility between metal flashing components is essential. Materials to be incorporated into the system shall be compatible.

B. Provide written declaration that metal flashings will be installed to comply with S.M.A.C.N.A. and C.R.C.A. Standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Metal Roofing: 24 gauge standing seam as manufactured by Lam Metal (Design Standard) www.lammetal.ca or equivalent . Colour: to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer‟s full range. Paint type to be two-coat system based on the Kynar 500 resin system 10000 Series or equivalent.

B. Accessories: Provide accessories as indicated on drawings, and as required to complete with project in accordance with material manufacturers recommendations.

C. Sealant: Provide sealant as specified in Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

http://www.lammetal.ca/


D. Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized type with spiral shank complete with lead washers of suitable length to safety hold metal roofing, head of fasteners shall be same colour as finished sheet. Screw type fasteners shall be of length sufficient to penetrate 1/4 inch beyond the sub-structure. Proprietary fasteners and clips shall be acceptable for metal roofing systems to a ULC or Warnock Hersey Certification program and be corrosion resistant.

E. Class 90 rated clip: as recommended by the manufacturer for the metal roofing system specified.

F. Cleats: of same material and temper as sheet metal, minimum 50 mm (2”) wide by 75mm (3”) long. Thickness to be the same as sheet metal being secured. Fasteners to suit roof design and allow for thermal movement.

G. Closures: Weatherproof laminated semi-rigid, cross linked polyethylene foam, tightly fit to panel profile.

H. Fixed Clips and Sliding Clips for longer panels (over 2 m): Zinc roofing manufacturers standard.

I. Building Paper: refer to Section 07290 Weather Resistive Barriers.

J. Flashings: Same material and finish as cladding profiles. Cap flashing: to match metal cladding. Coordinate with work of Section 07620 to avoid duplication.

K. Self Adhering Waterproofing Membrane: “Suprema Suprovapour/water or ice and water shield equivalent. including associated primer

L. Condensation Barrier: ConStop, Slip sheet: heavy felt kraft paper.

M. Eave protection: to RCABC Guaranty Standards and in accordance with National Building Code.

N. Panel Forming Machines: Portable or fixed panel forming machines shall be inspected and certified through ULC or Warnock Hersey Certification Program.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive the work of this section with Installer present. Ensure conditions are acceptable for a satisfactory installation. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine reviewed Shop Drawings.

B. Co-ordinate and install fabricated steel components supplied under other sections.

C. Provide wood blocking as required and where detailed to receive snow guards, roof vents and accessories.

D. Co-ordinate and provide blocking for mechanical and electrical equipment as required.

E. Make adequate provision for possible erection stresses. Set framing into correct position, arrange true to lines, levels and elevations, plumb and uniformly spaced as required. Securely brace members in place to maintain them plumb and true until permanently fixed and held in place.


F. Make allowance for items required for strength and against movement and deflection, such as blocking, bracing, backing, in-fill pieces, fasteners, furring, grounds, shims, bucks, dowels, bolts and washers, and other hardware, whether indicated or not as required by Code.

3.3 MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and specifications for application indicated.

B. Check that substrates are smooth, clean dry and primed prior to commencing work.

C. Apply membrane only when air temperature is above 5 degrees C.

D. Apply membrane parallel to eaves. Install in shingle fashion so membrane sheds water.

E. Cut membrane into 3 – 5 m (10 – 15 ft.) lengths and re-roll. Peel back 300-600 mm of release paper, align membrane on lower edge of roof and adhere first 300 – 600 mm. Pull release paper under membrane and continue to peel from membrane. Press membrane in place and roll lower edges firmly with a hand roller.

F. Overlap side laps a minimum of 100mm and end laps a minimum of 150mm.

G. Apply two layers of membrane over all dormers, valleys, and wall roof junctions .

3.4 METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Ensure work is performed by trained crews in accordance with manufacturer‟s printed instructions, recommendations, and these specifications.

B. Adjust metal roofing systems to final position before permanently fastening to structural supports.

C. Install metal roofing sheets on support clips in strict accordance with the manufacturer‟s proper construction procedure. Ensure metal roofing sheet side-lap is positively locked for full length of roof and proper sheet coverage is maintained. Field cut mitres where required.

D. Locate end laps over structural supports. Lap ends a minimum 100 mm.

E. Where indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings, secure end lap of metal roofing in accordance with the manufacturer‟s specifications and details to provide a weather-tight seal.

F. Install notched and formed closures in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings. Seal against weather penetration, at changes is pitch, at ridges and eaves, as detailed, and where required.

G. Install flashings as indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings.

3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP

A. Protect work of other sections from damage resulting from the work of this section.

B. Protect material is stored on construction site from weather so possibility of moisture entrapment on profiled metal is eliminated.

C. Clean panels during erection or immediately subsequent to it, and touch-up paint to minor abrasions, to ensure uniform appearance.

D. Promptly as the work proceeds and at completion, remove surplus materials and equipment and leave premises neat and clean.


3.6 MANUFACTURERS/INSTALLERS:

Pre- Approved Manufacturer/Installers – (Design Standard)_

1. A list of pre-qualified roofing manufacturers/applicators is listed below for consideration

by contractors. All roofing applicators to be experienced members in good standing with

roofing associations such as R.C.A.B.C. or other for such work.

Lam Metal

6962 Buller Avenue

Burnaby, British Columbia

V5J 4S3

Jack Lam Tel:1 604-430-3233

[email protected]

Summit Steel Cladding Inc.

Chris McBurney Tel: 604-533-4001 Ext 206

[email protected]

END OF SECTION




CARMACKS, YUKON WOOD SIDING

APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 07469

WOOD SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide spruce or pine siding and accessories as specified and indicated for a complete installation.



B. 07290 Weather Resistive Barriers.

C. 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.


1.3 REFERENCES

A. CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86 Amended 1998 Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction.

B. CSA B111-Rev. 1974 (1998) Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.

C. NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber 2002.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include manufacturers' product specifications, standard details, dimensions, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and installation.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating details of flashing installation.

D. Samples: Submit two (2) 600 mm (24 inch) pieces of siding with finish and profile specified.

E. Maintenance Materials:

1. Prior to start of work provide Owner with 2% of siding specified on Owner’s use as maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01770 Closeout Procedures.

2. Package extra materials with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents.


A. Provide and maintain dry, off-ground weatherproof storage.

B. Remove only in quantities required for same day use.

C. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with labels intact.

D. Handle and store materials to prevent water damage, staining, or other physical damage. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for Project site storage, handling, and protection.



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

E. Unused Materials: Unused shingles remain property of Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Horizontal Wood Siding:

1. Species: Spruce or Pine.

2. Type: Plain bevel, lapped.

3. Size: Nominal 200 mm x 19 mm (8 inch x 3/4 inch).

4. Grade: Quality Knotty – tight knot.

5. Moisture Content: Kiln dried.

B. Vertical Wood Siding:

1. Species: Spruce or Pine.

2. Type: Tongue and groove.

3. Size: Nominal 200 mm x 19 mm (8 inch x 3/4 inch).

4. Grade: Quality knotty.

5. Moisture Content: Kiln dried.

C. Air Barrier: Provide air barrier as specified in Section 07290 Weather Resistive Barriers.

D. Vapour Retarder: Polyethylene sheet: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, 6 mm thick.

E. Nails: to CSA O118.1, Appendix E and nails to be hot dipped galvanized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive siding with Installer present. Correct conditions that would adversely affect siding installation. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure air barrier, membrane flashing, metal flashing and blocking have been installed and approved prior to start of installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION – HORIZONTAL SIDING

A. Fasten Horizontal Cedar siding and blocking as recommended by the Western Red Cedar Association. Cut butt joints at 45° and for vertical siding slope to outside. Seal cut surfaces.

B. Nail at 300 mm on center along intermediate supports, along edges, and as indicated on drawings. Caulk vertical joints.

C. Butt joints on studs and nail top and bottom each side. Adjacent siding pieces to touch lightly at butt joints. Leave 5 mm space between siding and window and door trim, caulk with sealant.



APRIL, 2010 PAGE 3

3.4 INSTALLATION – VERTICAL SIDING (IF APPLICABLE)

A. Install vertical and horizontal strapping as indicated.

B. Install sill flashings, wood starter strips, inside corner flashings, edgings and flashings over openings.

C. Fasten wood siding in straight, aligned lengths to furring at 400 mm (16 inches) on center maximum using two (2) nails at each fixing location. Intermediate butt joints are not permitted. Cut butt joints at 45

o and for vertical siding slope to outside. Seal cut surfaces.

D. Apply battens over vertical joints as indicated (where not T & G)

3.5 CLEANING

A. Promptly as the work progresses remove debris and recycle products suitable for recycling. Leave site tidy with surfaces swept clean.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 07500 CARMACKS, YUKON MEMBRANE ROOFING APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 07500 MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide 2 ply SBS modified bitumen membrane roofing system over plywood decking (where specified) , sloped to drain, with accessories for a complete installation as indicated and specified or self adhered membrane as specified .

B. System includes flashings, scuppers, expansion joints, control joints, cant strips, edge strips, crickets, and performing other work as required to provide a complete waterproof system.



B. 07620 Ply Metal Flashing and Trim.

C. Division 15 Mechanical.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D2829, Sampling and Analysis of Built-Up Roofs.

B. ASTM D3447, Emulsified asphalt adhesive.

C. ASTM D4586, Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free.

D. ASTM D5147, Test Method for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Ply Material.

E. ASTM E84, Flame spread.

F. ASTM E96, Water vapor transmission.

G. ASTM E108, Spread of flame.

H. CGSB 37GP56M, Classification: Type 2, Class C, Grade 2.

I. CSA A123.4-04, Asphalt for Constructing Built-Up Roof Coverings and Waterproofing Systems.

J. CSA A231.1-99, [R2003], Precast Concrete Paving Slabs.

K. CSA O121-M1978, [R 2003], Douglas Fir Plywood.

L. CSA O151-M1978, [R1998], Canadian Softwood Plywood.

M. DIN 50018, Testing in a saturated atmosphere in the presence of sulfur dioxide.

N. FMRC Loss Prevention Data Plys 1-7; 1-28; 1-28R; 1-29; 1-29R; 1-49, Factory Mutual Research Corporation.

O. FMRC Approval Guide - Roof Coverings, Factory Mutual Research Corporation.

P. FMRC Standard 4470, Approval Standard for Class I Roof Covers, Factory Mutual Research Corporation.

Q. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual-4th Edition, National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA).


R. Architectural Ply Metal Manual, Ply Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).

S. Roofing Practices Manual, Roofing Contractor‟s Association of B.C. - RCABC Guarantee Corporation (RGC), Current edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to the following publications for terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this section.

1. ASTM D1079, Definitions of Terms Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous Materials.

2. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual

3. Roof Consultants Institute Glossary of Terms

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Reinforced elastomeric bitumen waterproofing system with mechanically fastened base ply and heat-welded cap ply. Top surface of base ply is covered with a thermofusible plastic film and shall have two distinctive blue lines to facilitate roll alignment and fastener positioning.

1. Base Ply: Duo selvedge ply, 70% self-adhesive and 30% thermofusible. Self-adhesive component protects combustible surfaces and thermofusible component provides efficient seal.

2. Cap Ply: Bottom surface of cap ply is covered with a thermofusible plastic film and top surface is protected by coloured granules.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer‟s published installation instructions; flashing and roofing specifications, product data for each products, and Material Safety Data Sheet for all products used in the assembly of the roof system.

1. Submit sample RCABC Guarantee Corp. or equivalent sample warranty. Sample copies shall be signed by authorized parties signifying acceptance of warranty terms and conditions.

2. Submit sample manufacturer‟s warranty for Owner‟s review at Pre-installation Conference.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide complete installation details of roofing, flashing, fastening and insulation, including notation of roof slopes and fastening patterns of insulation and base modified bitumen membrane.

1. Manufacturer‟s Certification: Submit manufacturer‟s certification that system materials specified and Drawing details are acceptable to manufacturer for deck and surfaces to which materials are to be applied.

a. Where proposed details are not acceptable to manufacturer, submit corresponding details for particular application with manufacturer‟s reasons for not accepting conditions indicated.

b. Make no deviations to Specifications without written approval by manufacturer. Submit such approval to Consultant for verification and resubmit to the contractor.


D. Samples:

1. 12” x 12” square sample of each ply sheet material installed under exposed membrane.

2. Flashing materials used.

3. Insulation adhesive.

4. Fastener types used.

5. Metal copings, counterflashings, edge metals.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Manufacturer‟s complete recommended maintenance procedures for roofing system, including precautions and warnings to prevent damage to, and deterioration of roofing system, and any safety precautions published by the roof system manufacturer.

F. Submit a document issued by CSA certifying roofing system offered meets requirements of CAN/ULC-S107-03 “Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Roof Coverings “Class A.

G. Roofing Manufacturer‟s Field Fastener Testing Report: In general compliance with Metro Dade Test Protocol PA 105.

H. Certificates:

1. Membrane manufacturer‟s written approval of:

a. The roof system to be applied over the submitted insulation and deck type.

b. Applicator.

c. Warranty conditions.

2. Field Inspection Reports, Punchlists, and As-Built Finalized Roof-Top Drawings: At completion of roof application.

3. Certification of Compliance: From membrane manufacturer at job completion confirming installed roof assembly is in compliance with approved submittals.


A. Roof system shall comply with the following codes and test requirements.

1. Underwriters Laboratories Canada or Warnock Hersey Class „A‟ external fire classification.

2. Factory Mutual Research Corporation windstorm classification FM I-90.

3. Install roof system assembly in compliance with local building and safety requirements adopted by authority having jurisdiction.

B. Roofing and ply metal work will be performed in conformance with roofing manufacturer's written recommendations and ULC laboratories Class A requirements.

C. Manufacturer‟s Qualifications:

1. Must have a minimum of 15-years of manufacturing experience in SBS modified bitumen roofing membranes.

2. Must provide a factory trained, salaried technician to attend site meetings, follow-up inspections and to perform final inspection of the roofing system.


3. Provide a labor and material warranty upon satisfactory installation of the roofing system.

D. Installer Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer prior to bidding period and throughout installation, and able to present a certification upon Consultant‟s request.

1. Applicator must have installed at least five roofs of same materials and methods specified for this project.

2. Maintain a permanent office within 500 miles of project site;

3. Maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman experienced with the specified roof system on-site when roof system application is in progress. Certification of general experience specific roof system experience shall be included in the submittal;

4. Be equipped with trained crew and equipment required to perform work of this section.

a. Maintain equipment and tools in good working order;

b. Provide written safety plan and equipment to the work force and specify, in writing, proper clothing.

5. Shall appoint a safety coordinator who shall be a member of the roofing installation crew. The appointment shall be conveyed to the Building in writing including all qualifications for the appointment;

6. Maintain a daily job log to be kept on site at all times from the pre-roofing conference. The job log shall include:

a. Copies of submittals.

b. Safety coordinator appointment with emergency telephone numbers; fall protection plan and material safety data sheet for each product.

c. Daily crew attendance and time records.

d. A summary of each days work including any photographs of detail revisions.

e. Accident reports.

f. Material delivery records.

E. Inspection Agency: Owner will appoint and pay for an independent inspection agency. Cooperate with inspection agency.

1. Inspections: A salaried manufacturer‟s representative shall be present during initial installation to ensure proper installation procedures are followed and that roofing system has been installed according to published specifications, standards, and details.

F. Pre-installation Conference: Prior to job start-up hold a pre-installation conference with Owner, Consultant, Installer, and manufacturer‟s representative present. Review installation requirements. Correct deviations from manufacturer‟s requirements for substrates.

1. Inspect and make notes of job conditions prior to installation.

2. Take minutes at conference and provide to parties present.

3. Note outstanding issues in writing designating responsible party for follow-up action and timetable for completion.

4. Ensure application of roofing does not take place until outstanding issues are completed.


1.8 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials and store in their unopened original packaging, bearing the manufacturer‟s name, related standards and any other specification or reference accepted as standard.

1. When stored outdoors, insulation is to be stacked on pallets or dunnage at least four (4) inches above ground level and covered with “non-sweating” tarpaulins.

B. Protect and permanently store materials in a dry, well-vented and weatherproof location. Only materials to be used the same day shall be removed from this location. During winter, store materials in a heated location with a 50° F. minimum temperature, removed only as needed for immediate use. Keep materials away from open flame or welding sparks.

C. Carefully store materials delivered in rolls on end with selvage edges up, a minimum of 6-inches above grade. Store metal flashings and counterflashings in such a way as to prevent wrinkling, twisting, scratching and other damage.

D. Avoid stockpiling of materials on roofs without first obtaining acceptance from the Consultant.

E. Adhesive storage must be between the range of above 50° and below 80° F. Area of storage shall be suitable for flammable storage.

F. Remove suspect and/or damaged materials and replace with undamaged materials.

1.9 FIRE PROTECTION

A. Prior to start of work, conduct a site inspection to establish safe working practices and make sure that all procedures and proposed changes are approved to minimize the risk of fires.

B. Respect safety measures described in the Soprema Specifications Manual as well as local association recommendations.

C. At end of each workday, use a heat detector gun to spot any smoldering or concealed fire. Job planning must be organized to ensure workers are still on location at least one hour after torch application.

D. Never apply the torch directly to old and wood surfaces.

E. Throughout roofing installation, maintain a clean site and have one approved ABC fire extinguisher within 6 meters of each roofing torch. Respect all safety measures described in technical data sheet.

F. Do not place torches near combustible or flammable products. Do not use torches where flame is not visible or cannot be easily controlled.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Product manufacturer shall issue a written, signed document in Owner's name, certifying product performance properties for a period of ten (10) years, dated from date of Substantial Performance. Warranty shall cover removal and replacement of defective roof membrane products, including labour. Warranty shall remain a full warranty for duration of period specified. Scope of warranty shall not be limited by other system components manufactured or distributed by membrane manufacturer. No letter amending manufacturer‟s standard warranty will be accepted and warranty certificate must reflect these requirements.

B. The manufacturer‟s approved Installer shall issue a written and signed document in Owner's name, certifying that work executed will remain in place and free of defects for a period of 5 years, starting from the date of Substantial Performance.


C. Repair damage to building exterior and interior damages resulting from failure to prevent penetration of water or debris during construction at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Soprema Inc.

2. No substitutions.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Waterproofing materials shall be provided by same manufacturer. Provide a written declaration to Consultant that roofing materials and components are compatible.

B. Prefabricated membrane shall comply with CAN/CGSB 37-GP-56M (9th draft)

2.3 BASE PLY

A. Base Ply: Soprafin Base 630, mechanically fastened, as per manufacturer‟s directions to plywood deck.

2.4 BASE PLY FLASHING

A. Base Ply Flashing Membrane: SOPRAFLASH FLAM STICK by SOPREMA

2.5 CAP PLY AND CAP PLY FLASHING

A. Cap Ply Membrane and Cap Ply Flashing: Torch on, SOPRAFIX TRAFFIC CAP 660 by Soprema

2.6 UPSTAND SYSTEM - SELF-ADHESIVE BASE PLY

A. Upstand System:

1. Primer: Elastocol Stick primer.

2. Base Ply: Self adhesive two ply modified bitumen membrane covered with thermofusible plastic film and bottom surface is protected by silicone release paper: Product: Sopraflash Flam Stick self-adhesive stripping.

3. Cap Ply: Heat welded two ply modified bitumen membrane protected with coloured granules, bottom surface covered with thermofusible plastic film. Cap ply membrane is applied by heat-welding. Product: Sopralene Flam 180 granular cap stripping on

2.7 ACCESSORY MEMBRANES

A. Perimeter Membrane: Heavy-duty SBS modified bitumen base ply, both faces with a sanded surface. Both edges of top face have a 200 mm (8 inch) selvage protected by a silicone-coated release film. Product: PERIMET‟R by SOPREMA. Install perimeter membrane before field base ply and base ply flashing.

B. Roofing Membrane Reinforcement: Prefabricated roof membrane with composite heavy duty non-woven polyester and glass mat reinforcement and SBS modified bitumen, conforming to CAN/CGSB 37-GP-56M (9th draft) . Both sides are covered with thermofusible plastic film, [sanded] [the under side is self-adhesive]. The top face shall be marked with three (3)


distinctive blue chalk lines to ensure proper roll alignment. Product: SOPRAFLASH FLAM STICK by SOPREMA.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Expansion Joint System: Soprajoint by Soprema.

B. Fasteners for Fastening to Wood: 1” round head roofing nails of galvanized steel, long enough to penetrate wood by at least 1” inch on nailers, flashings and parapet walls.

C. Gusset Material: Sopralene 180 Flam or Sopralene Flam Stick for gusset material, required on inside or outside corners.

D. Nailers and Blocking: Free of wane, shake, decay or checks, and pressure treated with water-borne preservatives for above ground use. Blocking: preservative-treated fir.

E. Pitch pocket filler: Aluminum coloured solvent-based mastic containing superior grade bitumen modified with SBS synthetic rubber and fibers. Designed for pitch box filling. MAMMOUTH PITCH POCKET FILLER by Soprema.

F. Primer:

1. For Torch Welded Membranes: ELASTOCOL 500 primer.

2. For Self Adhesive Membranes: ELASTOCOL 700 or ELASTOCOL STICK primer for self-adhesive membranes for applications at temperatures above minus10 degrees C.

G. Roof Drains: Copper flange 600 mm x 600 mm x 0.7 mm thick (20 oz.).

1. Solder: In conformance with ASTM B32-03, Specification for Metal Solder and ASTM B370-03, Specification for Copper Ply and Strip for Building Construction.

2. Clamping ring: Stainless steel or cast aluminum, with mechanically adjustable screws to ensure secure contact with down pipe.

H. Water Cut-Off Mastic: SBS Mastic (Trowel Grade) or SBS Mastic caulking.

I. Waterproofing Mastic: Mastic of synthetic rubbers, plasticized with bitumen and solvents and aluminum pigments to provide greater U.V. resistance: SOPRAMASTIC ALU.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to start of work examine surfaces to receive roofing with Installer, Consultant, Owner‟s Roofing Inspection Agency, membrane manufacturer and Owner present. Ensure surfaces are smooth, clean, dry and free of debris that would adversely effect membrane installation.

B. Review vertical surfaces including parapet walls, roof drains, stack vents, vent outlets and others, building joints. Review slopes, wood blocking, up-stands, parapets, construction joints, roof drains, plumbing vents, ventilation outlets and others projections through the deck.

C. Verify work of other trades has been properly completed, inspected by authorities having jurisdiction and approved.

D. If applicable ensure Owner‟s Inspection Agency has approved deck conditions.

1. If necessary, Owner‟s Inspection Agency shall issue Contractor a non-conformity notice so required corrections can be made.


E. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Start of work means roofing conditions are acceptable for work completion and acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Follow manufacturer‟s preparation instructions. Ensure preparation is completed in conformance with recommendations in manufacturer‟s Specifications Manual, particularly for fire safety precautions.

B. Ensure openings, penetrations, and projections are sealed to prevent primers or debris from entering building.

C. Ensure equipment and tools are in good working order.

D. Use of calcium or salt is forbidden for ice or snow removal.

E. Do not install materials during rain or snowfall.

F. Asphalt Primer Application: Prime dissimilar surfaces to which membrane will come in contact. Apply at the rate of 150 - 200 sq. ft. gallon. Coat metal flashings and fascia that will come in contact with membrane.


A. Perform roofing work on a continuous basis as surface are readied and weather conditions allow.

B. Protect adjoining surfaces against damage that could result from roofing installation.

C. Install only as much roofing as can be completely covered in one day. If weather conditions do not permit completion, temporarily weatherproofed exposed areas to prevent water or snow infiltration from damaging materials already installed.

D. Seal seams not covered by a cap ply membrane in same day. Do not install cap ply if moisture is present at or in base ply seams.

E. Ensure continuous waterproofing conditions for roofs including protection during installation work by other trades and progressive protection as work is completed (e.g. vents, drains, etc.).

3.4 PRIMER APPLICATION

A. Ensure surfaces to receive primer are free of rust, dust, or residue that may hinder adherence.

B. Install primer over wood deck and other surfaces to receive membrane at rate recommended by membrane manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer‟s instructions.

3.5 INSTALLATION – MECHANICALLY FASTENED BASE SHEET MEMBRANE

A. Unroll base sheet membrane on substrate without adhering.

B. Take care to align the first strip with centre of drain and parallel to roof edge.

C. Let membrane relax at least 15 minutes before installing it, or burn plastic film ina zigzag fashion using a propane torch to relax it. In cold weather, use the second method.

D. Lay base sheet membrane at one end, pull firmly on membrane to stretch it flat, then install appropriate anchors, proceeding toward free end.

E. This system permits base sheet membrane joints to be unaligned and no staggering is required to facilitate installation of reinforcing band.


F. To avoid infiltrations, adhere first 75 mm (3 in.) of self-adhesive side laps using roller, then heat-weld last 25 mm (1 in.). The system has combined self-adhesive and heat-welded side laps.

G. Seal end joints by welding a 150-mm-wide protection band centred on joint.

H. Take special care to avoid creating wrinkles, blisters, and fishmouths in base sheet membrane.

I. Seal laps by running a hot trowel along the edge of the seam.

J. Run field base membrane ply tight up against vertical surfaces such as curbs, parapets, and vents.

3.6 INSTALLATION - PERIMETER BASE SHEETS WITH MECHANICAL FASTENERS

A. Unroll a strip of membrane without adhering at base of parapets and upstands.

B. Fasten base sheet membrane at one end, pull firmly on membrane to stretch it flat, then install appropriate anchors, proceeding toward free end.

C. Just before installing base sheet membrane on field surface or on upstands, remove protection strip from each edge of membrane to adhere base sheet membrane to perimeter membrane.

D. Seal joints by torch welding a 150-mm-wide protection strip centred on joint.

E. Avoid creating wrinkles, blisters, and fishmouths.

F. Ensure base sheet membrane ends over cant strip or at edge of substrate as detailed.

G. Ensure base ply flashing is complete before start of work on cap ply. Install base ply flashing at end of each day's work to ensure daily dry-in.

3.7 INSTALLATION REINFORCEMENT GUSSETS

A. Install gussets at angles, on inside and outside corners.

B. Install self-adhesive gussets before installing self-adhesive base sheet membrane.

3.8 BASE SHEET FLASHING INSTALLATION - SELF ADHERED

A. Apply base sheet flashing only when primer coat is dry.

B. Before applying membranes, remove plastic film on section to be covered if there is an overlap inside and outside corners and field surface. For sanded base sheet membranes, apply ELASTOCOL STICK to area to be covered at foot of parapets.

C. Position pre-cut membrane piece. Peel back 4 to 6 inches (100 to 150 mm) of silicone release paper to hold membrane in place at top of parapet.

D. .Gradually peel back remaining silicone release paper, pressing down on membrane with an aluminium applicator to ensure good adhesion. Use aluminium applicator to ensure a perfect transition between upstand and field surface.

E. Smooth entire membrane surface with a roller for full adhesion.

F. Cut off corners at end laps to be covered by next roll.

G. Install a reinforcing gusset in inside and outside corners.

H. Seal overlaps at end of workday.


3.9 CAP SHEET INSTALLATION - TORCH APPLIED

A. Once base sheet is applied and no defects are apparent, proceed with cap sheet installation.

B. Begin with double-selvage starter roll. If starter roll is not used, side laps covered in granules shal be degranulated by embedding side laps in torch-heated bitumen over a 100 mm width.

C. Unroll cap sheet at drain. Carefully align first side lap parallel to roof edge.

D. Weld cap sheet onto base sheet with torch recommended by membrane manufacturer. During application, simultaneously melt both designated contact surfaces so a bead of bitumen is apparent as cap sheet unrolls.

E. Avoid overheating.

F. Make sure joints between two layers are staggered by at least 300 mm.

G. Overlap cap sheet side laps by 100 mm (4 inches) and end laps by 150 mm (6 inches). Cut off corners at end laps to be covered by next roll. De-granulate overlap surfaces.

H. Complete perfect welds between two membranes. Leave no zone unwelded. In cold weather, adjust welding time to obtain homogenous seam. It may be necessary to slow down application in certain cases.

I. Once cap sheet is installed, carefully check overlapped joints.

J. During installation, take care to avoid excessive bitumen bleed-out at joints.

3.10 INSTALLATION - CAP SHEETS ON UPTANDS AND PARAPETS - HEAT WELDED

A. Install cap sheet in one-metre-wide strips. Overlap side joints 100 mm (4 icnches ) minimum and stagger at least 100 mm (4 inches) with respect to joints of cap sheet on field surface to avoid areas of excessive membrane thickness.

B. Ensure overlaps on field surface are 50 mm (2 inches) wider than those of base sheet membrane on upstands and parapets.

C. At end laps, angle-cut corners that will be covered by following roll.

D. Use a chalk line to draw a straight line on field surface 150 mm (6 inches) from upstands and parapets.

E. Use a propane torch and round-nose trowel to embed surface granules in layer of hot bitumen starting from the chalk line on field surface to bottom edge ofe upstand or parapet as well as on granulated vertical surfaces that are to be overlapped.

F. Heat weld cap sheetdirectly to base sheet membrane, proceeding from bottom to top. This technique softens both membranes in order to obtain even, continuous weld.

G. During installation be careful not to overheat membrane or to create excessive bitumen bleeding at joints.

3.11 INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES

A. Protection Board: Install protection board in ¾” (min.) wide beads of adhesive at 12 inches on center. Walk in boards continuously until set. Refer to manufacturers instructions on adhesive cans.

B. Pedestals: install in accordance with manufacturer‟s instructions. Install pedestals so pavers present a level surface. Tolerances for pavers: as specified in section 02780 Unit Pavers.


3.12 WATER CUT-OFF

A. At work day‟s end, and when precipitation is eminent, construct a water cut-off at open edges with same membrane and asphalt. Ensure cut-off is able to withstand extended periods of wet weather. Completely remove water cut-off prior to resuming roofing system installation.

3.13 FIELD CONTROL

A. Field inspection will be performed as outlined in Part 1 of this Section.

3.14 WATERPROOFING AT ROOF DRAINS

A. Provide a smooth transition from drain bowl to deck surface. Prime metal surfaces.

B. Copper drains: Install copper drains in accordance with membrane manufacturer‟s details.

C. Torch weld reinforcement band (1 metre x 1 metre) of membrane type recommended by membrane manufacturer in a diagonal position to base sheet and previously primed drain flange. Apply manual pressure at drain connectors.

D. Install cap sheet to edge of opening.

E. Fasten dome to drain.

F. Test drains for proper flow and water tightness. Correct defects.

3.15 CLEANING

A. Clean-up and remove from site daily; wrappings, empty containers, paper, loose particles and other debris resulting from these operations.

B. Ensure finished surfaces are free from excessive asphalt SBS markings.

C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.

3.16 PROTECTION

A. Provide traffic ways, erect barriers, fences, guards, rails, enclosures, and chutes to protect personnel, roofs, structures, vehicles and utilities.

B. Plywood is mandated for traffic ways over newly installed membrane when transporting over roofs. Plywood shall be not less than 5/8 inch thick.

C. Obtain permission from manufacturer before permitting traffic over new roofing.

END OF SECTION

FULLERTON SECTION 07555 RICHMOND, BC SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING FEBRUARY, 2006 PAGE 12

CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION

_________________________________________, supplier of the roof system on

________________________________________ have completed interim and final inspections

of the project in compliance with the Contract Documents and the Schedule established at the pre-

installation conference.

Final inspection of the project is now complete, subject to the items noted below.

The roof system assembly installed is in compliance with the material and application standards required

for the issuance of the specified warranty. Work has been completed in compliance with approved details,

shop drawings, samples, mock-ups and manufacturer‟s recommendations.

Submittals and project correspondence have been submitted and have been included in Closeout

Documents.

A complete and final inspection has been carried out by __________________________ on

___/___/___ for the issuance of this certificate.

Noted Items:

For and on behalf of the Roof Membrane Manufacturer

Authorized Signatory __________________________________

Dated ___/___/___

E-PROD48A.doc

SOPREMA INC 1675 HAGGERTY

DRUMMONDVILLE, QC

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET 100323SCAN2E

Cancels and replaces 050721CAN2E

Moncton Quebec Montreal Ottawa Toronto London Winnipeg Saskatoon Edmonton Calgary Vancouver

LASTOBOND SHIELD HT

Description: LASTOBOND SHIELD HT is an SBS modified bitumen self-adhesive membrane, intended to be used as a roofing underlayment and/or as a Thru-Wall Flashing membrane in masonry or other cavity wall construction. It has a slip resistant surface composed of a polyethylene woven complex. This surface allows the use of LASTOBOND SHIELD HT on various slopes.

Because of its specific bituminous formulation, LASTOBOND SHIELD HT is designed to withstand service temperatures up to 115 °C (240 °F). It can therefore be used under metal roofing, and under asphalt shingles.

Minimal application temperature: 10 °C (50 °F).

The roof covering should be installed as soon as possible following the installation of LASTOBOND SHIELD HT.

Surface Preparation:

The use of a primer enhances the adhesion strength of self-adhesive membranes.

Contact your local SOPREMA technical representative for a list of approved surfaces, their preparation and the use of primer.

Properties

Properties Standards LASTOBOND SHIELD HT

Thickness (mm) - 1.0 (40 mil)

Dimension (m) - 22.9 x 0.91 (75 x 3 ft)

Roll weight (kg) - 20 (44 lb)

Top face - Tri-laminate woven polyethylene

Underface - Silicone release film

Tensile Strength, MD / XD (kN/m) ASTM D1970 11.3 / 15.4 (64 / 88 lbf/in.)

Ultimate Elongation, MD / XD (%) ASTM D1970 52 / 24

Static Puncture (N) ASTM D5602 400 (90 lb)

Lap Adhesion (N/m) ASTM D1876 2000 (11.4 lbf/in)

Peel Strength (N/m) ASTM D903 3050 (17.5 lbf/in.)

Tear Resistance, MD / XD ASTM D5601 375 / 400 (84 / 90 lb)

Cold Bending (°C) ASTM D1970 -30 (-22 °F)

Water Vapour Permeance (ng/Pa.s.m2) ASTM E96 (Procedure B) < 0.90 (0.016 perm)

(All values are nominal)

NOTE: SOPREMA INC. may modify the composition and/or utilisation of its products without prior notice. Consequently orders will be filled according to the latest specification.

E-MAM15A.doc

SOPREMA INC

1675 HAGGERTY DRUMMONDVILLE, QC.

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET 100326SCAN1E Cancels & replaces

090701CAN1E

Calgary Edmonton London Moncton Montreal Ottawa Quebec Saskatoon Toronto Vancouver Winnipeg

MAMMOUTH ELASTOCOL STICK

Description:

ELASTOCOL STICK is a primer designed to enhance the adhesion of self-adhesive membranes on porous surfaces such as “DENS GLASS GOLD” and “DENS DECK” at temperatures above –10ºC. It is composed of SBS synthetic rubbers, adhesive enhancing resins and volatile solvents. It is also suitable to prime non-porous surfaces such as concrete, fibre cement, metal, and wood.

Application: ELASTOCOL STICK can be applied with a brush, a roll or a spray can. It must be thoroughly dry before applying the waterproofing membrane. ELASTOCOL STICK must be shaken well before use.

WARNING: Do not accelerate drying of ELASTOCOL STICK by heating it with a torch.

Average coverage, porous surfaces: 0.3 to 0.5 L/m2,

non-porous surfaces: 0.1 to 0.25 L/m2.

Properties:

Properties ELASTOCOL STICK Specific gravity at 20C (kg/l) 0.79 Colour Red* Solids by Weight (%) 24 Viscosity, Brookfield (cP, 25ºC) 200 Flash point (ASTM D93) –30ºC (0ºF) Drying time 15 to 60 minutes

(All values are nominal) * For products manufactured after May 1, 2003. Before this date, the primer is grey.

Packaging: 3.78 L, 19 L pails and 350 g spray cans.

Shelf life: Up to 2 years in original sealed containers, in cool and ventilated area.

Cleaning: Tools can be cleaned with petroleum solvents such as mineral spirits, varsol, xylene, etc.

Precautions: ELASTOCOL STICK is a highly flammable product.

Store away from direct sunlight and open flame. Keep ignition sources away during application and until solvent has evaporated. Harmful if inhaled, swallowed or when in contact with the skin. In closed area, ventilate carefully using mechanical means if necessary. Do not pour residues in drains.

CONSULT THE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET PRIOR TO USE.

NOTE: SOPREMA INC. may modify the composition and/or utilisation of its products without prior notice. Consequently orders will be filled according to the latest specification.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 07620 CARMACKS, YUKON SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide metal flashing and trim not included in other sections with accessories for a complete installation as indicated and specified.

B. Provide rain water leaders, scuppers, gutters, coping and flashing as indicated.


A. 03300 Cast in Place Concrete.


C. 07400 Metal Roofing.

D. 07500 Membrane Roofing.

E. 07900 Joint Sealers.

F. 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.

G. 08525 Aluminum Window and Doors.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA), Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Fifth Edition, 1993.

B. Roofing Contractors Association of British Columbia (RCABC) Roofing Manual, current edition.

C. CSA B111-1998, Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.


A. Compatibility between metal flashings components is essential. Materials to be incorporated into the system shall be compatible.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: Provide three (3) samples of each type of sheet metal material, colour and finish.

C. Certification: Provide written certification that metal flashings will be installed to comply with SMACNA and RCG Standards.


A. Perform work in accordance with applicable standards in Architectural Sheet Metal SMACNA Manual and RCABC requirements.

B. Use experienced installers, with a minimum 3 years experience and familiar with common roofing sheet metal applications.

C. Mock-up: Mock-up window sill flashing of at least 2 windows and one parapet cap flashing section a minimum 12 feet long with joints and sealants to Consultant’s satisfaction.


A. Provide and maintain dry, off-ground weatherproof storage.


B. Store membrane flashing to be used in conjunction with metal flashings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Remove in quantities required for same day use.

D. Indicate on sheet metal flashings or wrappings:

1. Manufacturer's name and brand.

2. Compliance with applicable standards.

E. Deliver fasteners in boxes or kegs and keep in protective storage until used. Do not oil or grease.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Flashing and trim including scuppers and masonry locations.

B. Prefinished Aluminum: Minimum 22 gauge, 16 gauge sill flashing.

C. Colour: To be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s standard range. To match roofing colour.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Membrane Flashing: Provide membrane flashing in accordance with Section 07290 Weather Resistive Barrier.

B. Sealants: In accordance with Section 07900 colour selected by Consultant.

C. Cleats: Of same material, and temper as sheet metal, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide. Thickness same as sheet metal being secured.

D. Fasteners: Of same material as sheet metal, to CSA B111, flat head roofing nails of length and thickness suitable for metal flashing application.

E. Washers: Of same material as sheet metal, 2.3 mm thick with rubber packings.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate metal flashings and other sheet metal work in accordance with SMACNA standards.

B. Form pieces in 3 meter maximum lengths, 1 meter minimum.

C. Hem exposed edges on underside. Use standing seams at inside and outside corners unless otherwise detailed. Use s-lock seams for horizontal joints in continuous line.

D. Fabricate sill flashings with folded “dog ear” end dams.

E. Form sections square, true, and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance and performance.

F. Coat metal with protective paint coating where in contact with mortar, concrete or dissimilar metal.

G. Scuppers: Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA and RGC Standards. Provide watertight joints, hem exposed edges.

2.4 MEMBRANE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install membrane flashings as indicated and in accordance with membrane manufacturer’s recommendations. Refer to Section 07290.


2.5 METAL FLASHINGS

A. Caulk perimeter flashings with specified sealant where necessary to make a proper seal.

B. At highly visible areas utilize particularly tight well crimped 'S' joints, lock joints and caulk end joints in flashing. Provide standing seams with concealed clips at corners or as otherwise detailed. Hem exposed edges of flashing a minimum of ½ inch (12 mm) for rigidity.

C. Provide flashings with edges turned to form a drip, a minimum of ½” from cladding face. Make proper allowance for expansion and contraction. Face clip flashings with concealed clips 24 inches (600 mm) on centers.

D. Carry face metal down exterior face a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) or as required to match existing.

E. Provide metal base and cap flashings to extend to within 1 inch (25 mm) of roof surface.

2.6 SCUPPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA and RCABC Standards. Provide watertight joints, hem exposed edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive metal flashing with Installer present. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure lumber and plywood have a moisture content of 19% or less prior to the application of flexible membrane flashing.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Use concealed fastenings except where others are approved prior to installation by Consultant.

B. Provide membrane flashing under metal flashings. Install in accordance with Section 07290 Weather Resistive Barriers.

C. Counter flash bituminous flashings at intersections of roof with vertical surfaces and curbs. Flash joints using S-lock seams on vertical and standing seams on horizontal joints. Form tight fit over roof cleats.

D. Lock end joints and caulk with sealant.

E. Where surface mounted reglets are used, mounted true and level, caulk top of reglet.

F. Insert metal flashings into reglets and under cap flashings to form weather tight junction.

G. Turn top edge of flashing into recessed reglet or mortar joint a minimum one inch (25 mm). Use wedge to secure in joint.

H. Caulk flashing joints with sealant.

I. Install scuppers to locations as shown, in accordance with RCABC details, with roof membrane securely fastened over scupper flanges, turned up at sides and cut out of cant strips. Ensure roof membrane base and cap sheets are carried into scuppers, full depth on horizontal and vertical sides of scuppers.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 07840 CARMACKS, YUKON FIRESTOPPING APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide firestopping and smoke seals as indicated on the drawings at fire separations, and as required by the National Building Code.

B. Coordinate the supply and installation of firestopping and smoke seals specified here and in Related Sections.


A. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry.

B. Section 09250 Gypsum Board Assemblies.

C. Division 15 Mechanical for specification of firestopping and smoke seals in mechanical assemblies.

D. Division 16 Electrical for specification of firestopping and smoke seals in electrical assemblies (i.e. inside cable trays)

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each product specified.

1. Material Booklet: Prepare and keep on site at all times for the reference by the Consultant or the authorities having jurisdiction, a materials booklet showing ULC ratings and test numbers and installation details for each product installed.

C. Submit proposed firestopping and smoke seal assemblies for required wall and floor conditions to Consultant for review. Consultant will submit reviewed documents to authority having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Firestopping and smoke seal systems: In accordance with National Building Code and CAN/ULC S101 - 1998.

1. Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN/ULC S101 - 1998 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.

2. Firestop system rating: As indicated on the drawings.

B. Service penetration assemblies: Certified by ULC in accordance with ULC-S115-95 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.

C. Fire-resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly not less than the fire-resistance rating of surrounding floor and wall assembly.


D. Firestopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables: elastomeric seal; do not use cementitious or rigid seal at such locations.

E. Firestopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal; do not use a cementitious or rigid seal at such locations.

F. Primers: To manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use.

G. Water (if applicable): Potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances.

H. Damming and Backup Materials, Supports and Anchoring Devices: To manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Sealants for vertical joints: Non-sagging.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and installation of materials with Installer present. Ensure substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost-free. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces in contact with firestopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation without interruption to air barriers and vapour retarders.

C. Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC certification and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.

C. Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing.

D. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish.

E. Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

3.4 INSPECTION

A. Notify Consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping materials and service penetration assemblies.


3.5 SCHEDULE

A. Firestop and smoke seal at:

1. Penetrations through fire-resistance rated gypsum board partitions and walls.

2. Attic compartments and attic fire stopping.

3. Top of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.

4. Intersection of fire-resistance rated gypsum board partitions.

5. Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations.

6. Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations.

7. Rigid Ducts Greater than 129 cm2: Firestopping to consist of bead of firestopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle and duct, on both sides of fire separation.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application.

B. Remove temporary dams after initial set of firestopping and smoke seal materials.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 07900 CARMACKS, YUKON JOINT SEALERS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide sealants for the work in accordance with requirements of individual Sections, as specified and as indicated.

B. Provide secondary sealants at seismic joints and other locations as indicated and specified.

C. Provide sealants not specified in other sections.



B. 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.

C. 06200 Finish Carpentry.

D. 06400 Architectural Woodwork.

E. 07290 Weather Resistive Barriers.

F. 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

G. 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.

H. 08565 Aluminum Windows and Doors.

I. 08800 Glazing.

J. 09250 Gypsum Board Assemblies.

K. Division 15 Mechanical.

L. Division 16 Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C639–01, Standard Test Method for Rheological (Flow) Properties of Elastomeric Sealants.

B. ASTM C834-00e1, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.

C. ASTM C920–02, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

D. ASTM C1193–00, Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

E. CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90, One-Component, Acrylic Emulsion Base Sealing Compound.

F. CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing.


A. Sealant systems installed with pressure gun. Include sealing of vertical and horizontal joints as required to make air and water tight.


B. Regardless of terminology used on Drawings, where "caulking" or "sealant" called for, use specified sealant continuously to seal entire area and assembly unless noted otherwise.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Indicate each type of sealant, chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability.

C. Samples:

1. Color Samples: Manufacturer’s full range. Submit additional custom color samples as directed by Consultant.

2. Backer Rod Samples: For vertical and horizontal applications.

3. Secondary Sealants: For vertical and horizontal applications.

D. Test Reports: Bond test results for joints between adjacent assemblies of construction materials specified for this project.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in work of this Section with minimum 5 years continuous documented experience for commercial quality sealant work comparable to Project scope.

B. Manufacturer: Make tests determining compatibility of exterior sealants with substrates as necessary to conform with manufacturer's Warranty provisions.

C. Coordination:

1. Coordinate, schedule, and sequence work of this Section as necessary to install sealant systems required for work of related Sections.

2. Coordinate with work of Section 07840 Firestopping for firestopping sealants at fire-resistive construction, assemblies, and occupancy separations.

3. Coordinate for matching and submittals of custom colors to match adjacent surfaces at exterior sealants and as directed by Consultant.

D. Conduct cut and pull tests for adhesion and cohesion with Consultant present and at locations determined by Consultant.

E. Mock ups: Mock up if requested at least 4 feet of each type of sealant for Consultant’s review and approval prior to installing balance of work. Mock up one entire unit of each of the following: interior and exterior door frame, window frame, aluminum entrances and storefront, washroom counter top, kitchen counter top

1. Mock up may remain as part of finished work upon Consultant’s approval.


A. Comply with provisions of Section 01600 Product Requirements.

B. Store and handle to protect from intrusion of contaminants.



A. Do not proceed with installation until Consultant has approved each type of sealant to be used in writing.

B. Temperature:

1. Do no work when the temperature is 5 oC (40oF) or below.

2. When working above 5 oC (40oF), follow manufacturer’s printed instructions concerning temperature ranges for product applications.

C. Moisture: Do no work when moisture is present or when surfaces to be sealed are wet.

D. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Warranty provisions of Section 01770 Closeout Procedures.

B. Provide the following manufacturer warranty:

1. Silicone Sealants: Standard 20 year Warranty against failure of material.

2. Other Sealants: Standard 5 year Warranty against failure of material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTERIOR SEALANTS

A. Sealant 1 (SL1) - Non-Traffic Locations:

1. Neutral Cure Silicone Sealants, to ASTM C920, Type S (single component), Grade NS, Class 25. Joint movement capabilities: minimum 50% extension and 50% compression. Subject to compliance with specifications the following products are acceptable:

a. Dow Corning 795 Silicone Structural Glazing and Weatherproofing Sealant.

b. Or approved alternative.

B. Sealant 2 (SL2) - Traffic Locations:

1. Conforming to ASTM C920, Type S (Single component), Grade P (pourable), Use T (Traffic), class 25; colors to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s standard range. Subject to compliance with specifications the following products are acceptable:

a. Sika “Sikaflex – 1CSL”.

b. Sonneborn "Sonolastic SL – 1”.

c. Pecora "Urexpan NR-200".

d. Or approved alternative.

2.2 INTERIOR SEALANTS

A. Sealant 3 (SL3) – Traffic Locations:


1. Conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, use T (Traffic) class 25; colors to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s standard range. Subject to compliance with specifications the following products are acceptable.

a. Tremco "THC 900".

b. Sonneborn "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant".

c. Pecora "Urexpan NR-200".

d. Or approved alternative.

B. Sealant 3 (SL3) – Non-Traffic Joints:

1. Conforming CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87 and to ASTM C920 Type S (Single Component) Grade NS (Non-Sag) Use NT. Subject to compliance with specifications, the following products are acceptable:

a. Spectrum 3 by Tremco, or approved alternative.

C. Sealant 4 (SL4) – Mildew Resistant:

1. Conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87 and ASTM C834 Type S (Single Component). Locations: joints in countertops in kitchens and bathrooms and in bathtubs or showers. Subject to compliance with specifications the following products are acceptable:

a. Tremsil 200 by Tremco, or approved alternative.

D. Sealant 5 (SL5) – Acoustic Sealant:

1. Acrylic latex sealant complying with CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90 and ASTM C834. Locations: joints requirements acoustical properties. Subject to compliance with specifications the following products are acceptable:

a. United States Gypsum – Acoustical Sealant.

b. Tremco – Tremflex 834.

c. Or approved alternative.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Cleaner: As recommended by sealant or caulking manufacturer for joint surfaces.

B. Joint Primers: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, as recommended by sealant manufacturer, for joint surface conditions encountered.

C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape/plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer, applied to sealant contact surfaces where bond to substrate or backer rod must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

D. Backer Rods: Provide non-adhering type as recommended by sealant manufacturer and the following:

1. Horizontal Joints: Closed cell polyethylene foam rod, except where joint filler is specified at paving.

2. Vertical Joints: Closed cell polyethylene foam or "soft rod" (skinned open cell) polyethylene foam.


3. Diameter: 1/3 greater than width of joint where it is to be installed.

4. Polystyrene foam and open cell rods are not acceptable.

E. Secondary Sealants: At seismic joints between buildings - pre-compressed, with factory applied and cured silicone facing and expanding foam sealant backing (permanently elastic Greyflex material), self adhering on one side, thicknesses as indicated or as required to maintain seal.

1. Vertical Joints: Seismic Colorseal by Emseal Joint Systems Ltd.

2. Horizontal Joints: Colorseal by Emseal Joint Systems Ltd.

F. Secondary Sealant at Storefront Joints: “Backseal” by Emseal.

2.4 COLOURS AND FINISHES

A. Match colors of adjacent surfaces, except where paintable sealants are installed, paint under work of Section 09900 Paints and Coatings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify surfaces and conditions ready to receive work of this Section. Do no work until conditions are satisfactory.

B. Verify surfaces clean and dry before proceeding.

C. Remove lacquers and protective films from metal surfaces.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure Consultant has approved each type of sealant in writing prior to application.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

D. Verify back-up material and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

E. Verify substrates are dry.

F. Perform preparation in accordance with referenced ASTM C920 for elastomeric sealants and ASTM C834 for latex type materials.

G. Apply masking tape tightly around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from excess sealants.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's instructions unless noted otherwise. Where in conflict with Contract Documents, follow more stringent requirements. Refer to requirements of individual sections.

B. Seal joints between locations as detailed and required to make weathertight.

C. Seal interior and exterior joints between locations as detailed and required to make weathertight. Refer to Architectural Drawings for window installation sequence.

1. Around windows, relights, doors, and other openings in walls.


2. Joints of dissimilar materials.

3. Horizontal joints, including exterior paving joints over joint filler.

4. At joints in sheet metal, flashing and trim.

D. Sealant beads shall have a sectional width to depth ratio of 2 to 1, unless specified otherwise or recommended otherwise by the sealant manufacturer.

E. Install sealants to size and shape indicated, with slightly concave surface.

F. Backing for Surfaces:

1. Where more than 3/4" wide pack with foam rod back-up material to within 1/2" of surface.

2. Where less than 1/2" wide install foam rod back-up material to within 1/4" of surface.

3. Where less than 1/2" deep, apply bond breaker tape to bottom of joints to prevent adhesion of sealant to bottom of joint.

4. Provide backing materials in as long lengths as practicable; install with proper tool. Force backing into joint to proper depth for sealant.

5. Do not insert with sharp objects. Do not puncture backer rod.

G. Install sealants in non-traffic joints with slight concave surface.

1. Sealant Bite: Install between 1/4" and 1/2" deep, except minimum 50% of joint width.

2. Narrowest Dimension at Sealant Profile: Minimum 1/8" thick at center of profile.

3. Verify dimension requirements with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Install sealants in concrete traffic joints with slightly concave surface and depth equal to 75% of joint width, except not more than 5/8" and not less than 3/8" deep. Verify dimension requirements with manufacturer's instructions.

I. Seal joints before final coat of finish is applied to adjacent surfaces.

J. Provide positive contact to concrete, masonry, metal, and other finish surfaces.

3.4 REPAIR

A. Examine installation carefully. Repair areas where sealant is not properly adhered due to bubbles, foreign matter, or other defects.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove excess sealant material. B. Remove and dispose of masking materials. C. Leave surfaces neat, clean, and smooth.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect surfaces adjacent to joints. Apply masking around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from defacement and staining during sealing operations.

B. Protect from dust, moisture, and other harmful substances during installation. C. Protect sealed joints for at least 12 hours.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 08110 CARMACKS, YUKON METAL DOOR AND FRAMES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Supply pressed steel frames and hollow, insulated and uninsulated, metal doors as indicated and specified.

B. Installation of pressed steel frames and hollow metal doors, refer to Section 06200.

C. Coordinate with Section 08800 Glazing.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. 06200 Finish Carpentry.

B. 07620 Metal Flashing and Trim.


D. 08710 Finish Hardware.

E. 08800 Glazing.

F. 09900 Paints and Coatings.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A653/A653M-03, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. ASTM A924/A924M-99, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. CAN4-S104-1980(1985), Fire tests of Door Assemblies.

D. CAN/CGSB 1.198-2001, Cementitious Primer for Galvanized Surfaces.

E. CAN/CGSB 12.1-M90, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass.

F. CAN/CGSB 12.8-97 01-Jun-1997, Insulating Glass Units.

G. CAN/CGSB 19.24-M90, Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound.

H. CAN/ULC-S702-1997, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.

I. CSDFMA – Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers Association.

J. NFPA 80-1999, Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.

K. NFPA 252-1999, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

L. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

M. Warnock Hersey Inc. (WHI).


A. Steel fire rated doors and frames shall be labeled and listed by an organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN4-S104M or NFPA 252 for ratings specified or indicated.


B. Provide fire labeled frame products for those openings requiring fire protection ratings, as scheduled. Test products in conformance with CAN4-S104, or NFPA 252 and listed by a nationally recognized agency having factory inspection services and constructed as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/ Factory Inspection Manuals issued by listing agency to individual manufacturers.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Requirements.

B. Product Data: Include product data and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide six (6) sets of shop drawings.

2. Indicate each type of door, material, steel core thickness, mortises, reinforcements, location of exposed fasteners, openings, arrangement of hardware, fire rating, and finishes.

3. Indicate each type of frame material, core thickness, reinforcements, location of anchors and exposed fastenings reinforcing, fire rating and finishes.

4. Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and door schedule.

D. Samples:

1. Identify each sample by label indicating applicable specification paragraph number, brand name and number, finish, and hardware package number.

2. Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type door.

3. Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type of frame. Show butt cutout, reinforcements and anchors.


A. Deliver hollow metal work to the site fully protected and with adequate location and installation details.

B. Provide packaging as required to completely protect metal doors and frames during transportation and storage.

C. Store metal doors in vertical position, in a protected dry area, at least 25 mm (1”) off the floor and with not less than 6 mm (1/4”) air space between units to maintain dry, ventilated conditions, and to prevent damage to materials or structure.

D. Protect frames completely from mechanical or water damage by covering with reinforced paper or polyethylene and by wood strips fastened to jambs to prevent scarring. Maintain protection until equipment and fixtures are installed.

E. Leave spreaders in place until frames are braced or anchored in final location.

F. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Contract.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warrant steel doors and frames from defects in workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Steldor Ltd.

2. Macotta.

3. S.W. Fleming Ltd.

4. Shanahans.


2.2 DOORS - GENERAL

A. Fabricate to Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturer’s Association (CSDFMA) specifications for steel doors and frames. Doors and frames shall be fabricated from commercial grade sheet steel, Class 1 with ZF075 zinc coating to ASTM A924.

B. Door Reinforcement: Mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully templated hardware in conformance with hardware listed for each door in Hardware Schedule. Provide reinforcing plates only for surface mounted hardware. Drill and tap for surface mounted hardware on site.

C. Frames: Mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully templated and mortised hardware only, in conformance with hardware listed for each door in Hardware Schedule. Provide reinforcing plates only for surface mounted hardware. Drill and tap for surface mounted hardware on site.

D. Hardware Reinforcing Plates: Hard-tempered steel. Minimum thickness 2.66 mm (12 gauge) except hinge and pivot reinforcements 4.55 mm (7 gauge).

E. Access Security System: See Door and Frame Schedule and coordinate with Division 16.

2.3 DOORS

A. Doors: Insulated and Un-insulated Hollow Metal, fabricated from one sheet of 1.6 mm galvanized steel each side, with core composed of rigid modified polyisocyanurate, closed cell type insulation; minimum 32kg/m3 and RSI 1.9. Fit top of doors fit with tightly fitting vinyl weather caps. Prime doors and make ready to receive paint finish.

B. Type: Seamless type with no visible seams on door face.

C. Reinforcement: Vertically stiffen door with welded 0.91mm thick interlocking “z” type steel ribs spaced at 152mm on center extended full height of door. Weld front skin stiffener offset to allow for 3mm clearance of bottom stiffeners. Weld “z” type stiffeners to back skin and interlock with top stiffeners. Form bottom stiffeners to fill full thickness of door. Depth of stiffeners: 41mm. Offset stiffeners in door core minimum of 75mm.

D. Provide for glazed lights and door grilles as scheduled and detailed. Coordinate maximum light size with door use and fire rating.

E. Seams on Hinge and Lock Edges: Mechanically interlock and seal with silicone or epoxy.

F. Spot weld hinge edge seams and grind smooth 25 mm from each side of hinge locations.

G. Longitudinal Edges: Seamless, welded, filled and sanded flush.

H. Top and Bottom Channels: Flush and filled solid, extending full width of door and welded to both sides.


I. Prepare doors to receive door grilles.

2.4 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS - DOORS

A. Prepare doors to receive hardware.

B. Through-drill mortise lock cylinder holes to permit standard reverse bevel interchangeability.

C. Include lock case centering clips for mortise lock case reinforcing.

D. Weld reinforcing plates in place.

E. Install hinge reinforcing of sufficient strength and tolerances to insure that reasonably even clearances can be obtained on all sides when installed in properly dimensioned frames.

F. Manufacture to sufficient tolerances to insure that no additional work is required on site to fit properly dimensioned mortise hardware.

G. Bevel hinge and lock edges 3 mm in 50 mm.

H. Mount locks and deadbolts in reinforced buckets to manufacturer’s specifications and weld into door cavity during construction.

2.5 FIRE-RATED METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Fire-Rated Doors, Frames and Sidelight Assemblies: Material and construction in accordance with requirements of ULC or WHI for class of door opening indicated; frames and sidelights minimum 1.6 mm (16 gauge). Doors, frames and sidelight assemblies shall bear the ULC or WHI label for class of opening scheduled.

B. Provide labeled doors for openings requiring fire protection ratings as scheduled. Fabricate doors in accordance with type of construction tested and approved by a nationally recognized testing agency having a factory inspection service.

C. Doors to be prepared to receive hardware.

2.6 FRAMES

A. Exterior Frames: 1.6 mm cold rolled steel stock, commercial grade galvanized to ASTM A924/A924M fully welded type. Exterior frames to be hot-dipped galvanized.

B. Interior Frames: 1.6 mm galvanized steel welded type, one piece construction fully welded type. Prime frame components ready for painting. Refer to Section 09900 Paints and Coatings.

2.7 FRAME HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped to fit hardware manufacturer’s templates, and glazed where required. Frames to be fully welded.

B. Frames shall have a minimum available width and depth of 45mm to accommodate an electric strike lock for a card Access System should one be required at a later date.

1. Reinforce for surface hardware.

2. Drill for face function holes.

C. Install three bumpers on strike jamb for each single door and two bumpers at head for pairs of doors.

D. Blanked, reinforced, drilled, and tapped for mortised butts and strike. Protect mortised butts and strike cut-outs with metal mortar guard boxes where required.


E. Reinforced, when required, for surface mounted hardware. Hardware preparation and location shall be in accordance with ANSI standard, each door opening to be prepared for single rubber bumpers, three (3) for single door openings, two (2) for double door openings.

2.8 FRAME FABRICATION

A. Cut mitres and joints accurately, assemble frames in position and weld continuously on inside of frame profile.

B. Grind welded corners and joints to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste filler and sand to uniform smooth finish.

C. Weld in two channel spreaders per frame to ensure proper frame alignment.

D. Fabricate steel door frames for openings 1200 mm or less in unsupported width from 1.52 mm thick steel fully welded.

E. Reinforce frame face on latch side with 6.4 mm x 25 mm x 925 mm steel plate centered on strike. Tack weld at ends at 150 mm on centre.

F. Manufacture to sufficient tolerances to insure that correctly installed frames will accept properly dimensioned doors with reasonably even clearances on all sides.

2.9 ANCHORS AND SPREADERS

A. Provide adjustable anchors of the manufacturer's standard to each frame as required.

B. Floor Anchors: Minimum 1.90 mm (14 ga.) thickness, securely welded inside each jamb; provide 2 holes at each jamb for floor anchorage. Note areas with depressed floor slabs.

C. Wall Anchors:

1. Concrete Walls: "Existing wall type" with an expansion shield drilled into the concrete. Countersink flat head stove bolt 1.6 mm (1/16") into the frame and fill with body putty. Smooth and make good surface.

2. Masonry Walls: Wire masonry anchor.

3. Steel Stud Partitions: Welded "U" type steel anchor or steel stud anchor twist-in type to frame manufacturer's standard.

4. Number of Wall Anchors (Each Jamb):

a. Frames up to 2134 mm (7'-0") Height: 3 anchors minimum.

b. Frames over 2134 mm (7'-0") Height: 4 anchors minimum and not less than 1 per each 610 mm (2'-0") or portion thereof.

D. Steel Spreaders: Provide metal frames with steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.

2.10 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Glazing for doors as indicated on Door Schedule, and as follows:

1. Tempered Safety Glass: To CAN/CGSB-12.1 tempered.

2. Wired Safety Glass: To CAN/CGSB 12.8 polished both sides.

B. Fire Rated Glazing: Refer to Section 08800 Glazing.


2.11 FINISHING

A. Sand and clean surfaces prior to epoxy filler application.

B. Fill seams, depressions, intersecting corners completely with epoxy filler and sand smooth.

C. Clean and chemically treat metal to provide maximum paint adhesion.

D. Install door grilles in hollow metal doors as scheduled. Door grilles supplied by others.

E. Prime paint doors and frame components ready for painting. Refer to Section 09900 Paints and Coatings.

F. Touch up with primer when finishes are damaged during fabrication.

2.12 ACCESSORIES

A. Sealants – General: Two component polyurethane to CAN/CGSB-19.24-M in custom colours to match or contrast surrounding materials as approved by the Consultant. Refer to Section 07900 Sealants.

1. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer.

B. Pre-formed Back-up Materials: Compatible with primers and sealants, oversized 30 – 50%:

1. Backer Rods: Polyethylene, urethane or vinyl: extruded closed cell foam backer rod. Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 140- 200 kPa.

2. Neoprene or Butyl Rubber: Round solid rod; Shore A hardness 70.

3. Polyvinyl Chloride or Neoprene: Extruded tubing with 6mm thick walls.

C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive Polyethylene tape which will not bond to sealant.

D. Primer for Galvanized Sheet Steel: CAN/CGSB1.198. Refer to Section 09900 Paints and Coatings.

E. Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous material, and regarding labeling and provision of material safety data acceptable to Labour Canada.

F. Thresholds: Provide accessible, low profile, aluminum thresholds, same width as door frame, as indicated and required by authority having jurisdiction. Aluminum: mill finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to which the work of this section is to be applied with Installer present and ensure that conditions are suitable to provide a complete and satisfactory installation.

B. Correct unsatisfactory surfaces or conditions.

C. Start of work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation to be done under Section 06200 Finish Carpentry.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 08210 CARMACKS, YUKON WOOD DOORS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Supply factory finished rated and non-rated wood doors and frames as indicated, scheduled and specified.

B. Provide carved/and or sandblasted wood doors as indicated – see cash allowance for same.

C. Provide wood entrances and storefront as indicated and specified.

D. Provide automatic door operator units with accessories as indicated and specified for a complete system.

E. Coordinate with the work of Section 06400. For exposed wood for transparent finish, except front entry, select all Maple or all Select White Birch for doors, wood paneling if applicable, and architectural woodwork. Do not mix veneers.

F. Installation of wood doors and frames. Refer to Section 06200 Finish Carpentry.




C. 06400 Architectural Woodwork.

D. 08710 Finish Hardware.

E. 08800 Glazing.

F. 09900 Paints and Coatings.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer’s Association of Canada Quality Standards Illustrated, 2003 edition, here after referred to as the QSI Manual.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Provide six (6) sets of shop drawings.

1. Indicate construction details of wood doors, typical and special installation conditions, materials being supplied, connections, attachments, anchorage and location of exposed fastenings.

2. Incorporate plans, elevations, sections and details for wood doors included in this section.

3. Include photographs of hand selected lumber proposed for use on entry doors and sidelights prior to fabrication.

4. Do not fabricate work until shop drawings have been reviewed and other related submittals, and samples as required by Specifications have been approved by Consultant.


5. Maintenance Bond: submit draft copy of Maintenance Bond with conditions as specified below.

C. Samples:

1. Submit two (2) finished samples 300 mm x 300 mm of each type of door corner with finish applied.

2. Approved samples shall become the standard for the work.

D. Schedule: Include a schedule identifying each unit, with door marks or numbers referencing the numbering in Consultant's schedules or drawings.


A. Wood doors and frames shall meet the requirements of the QSI for Custom Grade.

B. A copy of the QSI Manual, 2003 edition, shall be made readily available for reference purposes.

C. References in this specification to part and item numbers mean those parts and items contained in the QSI Manual.

D. Materials and installation shall be in Imperial measurement as indicated.

1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Wood door delivery storage and handling shall be in accordance with Section 1200 of QSI Manual.

B. Remove from job site materials which are damaged or do not comply with these specifications and replace with acceptable materials.

1.7 MAINTENANCE BOND

A. Manufacturer shall provide a two (2) year Maintenance Bond for the full value of the wood door and frame installation. Submit a draft copy of the bond prior to installation in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. At completion of the work submit executed Bond in accordance with Section 01770 Closeout Procedures. Include cost of bond in Contract Price.

B. Inspections: Attend the Owner’s inspection of wood doors 23 months from the date of Substantial Performance. Correct deficiencies identified by Owner’s prior to expiration of the Bond at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Use clean stock only and comply with QSI Standards for Custom Grade.

B. Wood Core Stiles and Lock-Block: Minimum 20 mm thick.

C. Wood Core Rails: Minimum 29 mm thick except 140 mm thick at top rail where closers specified.

D. Edges: No.1 edge QSI page 445 unless indicated otherwise.


2.2 WOOD ENTRANCE DOORS AND SIDE LIGHTS

A. Provide two sets of solid wood framed entrance doors and sidelights as indicated. One set of doors and sidelights is exterior and one set is interior. Construct both sets as for exterior doors using exterior adhesives.

B. Side Lights – Stiles and Rails:

1. AWI Quality Grade:Custom.

2. Style: Stile and rail with sealed units inset.

3. Material: Solid Douglas Fir, clear heart wood, hand selected for uniform colour.

4. Profile: 6 inches wide by 1 3/4 inches thick.

5. Unit Dimensions: as indicated.

6. Glazing: Double glazed sealed units as specified in section 08800 Glazing.

7. Finish: Shop finished, semi-transparent stain.

C. Exterior Wood Doors:

1. AWI Quality Grade: Custom.

2. Style: French.

3. Profile: 6 inches wide by 1 3/4 inches thick.

4. Unit Dimensions: as indicated.

5. Material: Solid Douglas Fir, clear heart wood, hand selected for uniform colour.

6. Finish: Shop finished, semi-transparent stain.

7. Glazing: Double glazed sealed units as specified in section 08800 Glazing.

8. Glazing: Tempered glass in panels as noted.

9. Hardware:Refer to Section 08710 Finish Hardware.

2.3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS FOR PAINT FINISH

A. Interior Wood Doors for Paint Finish:


2. Style: Flush.

3. Thickness: 1 3/4 inch (45 mm).

4. Core: Solid.

5. Construction:5 ply door. (7 ply is not acceptable).

6. Face: Hardboard, Masonite.


7. Edge: Solid 1/2 material.

8. Finish: Refer to Section 09900 Paints and Coatings.

9. Glazing: Tempered glass in panels as noted.

2.4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS – TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Doors:


2. Style: Flush.

3. Thickness: 1 3/4 inch (45 mm).

4. Core: Solid.

5. Construction: 5 ply door. (7 ply is not acceptable).

6. Wood Veneer Face: Maple or Select White Birch, rotary cut. Select

7. Edge: To match face of interior. Solid 1/2 wood.

8. Finish: Transparent stain with polyurethane varnish. Refer to Section 09900 Paints and Coatings.

9. Glazing: Tempered glass in panels as indicated and scheduled.

B. Feature Doors:

1. AWI Quality Grade: Premium.

2. Style: Flush.

3. Thickness: 1 3/4 inch (45 mm) Core: Solid.

4. Construction: 5 ply door. (7 ply is not acceptable).

5. Wood Veneer: Maple or Select White Birch. Rotary cut.

6. Edge: To match face of interior face. Solid 1/2 wood, maple or birch.

7. Finish: Transparent stain with polyurethane varnish. Refer to Section 09900 Paints and Coatings.

2.5 DOOR OPERATOR

A. Manufacturers:

1. Subject to compliance with specifications the following manufacturers are acceptable. Acceptable Manufacturers: Gyro Tech, Stanley, Besam, Door-O-Matic or approved alternative.

B. Door Operator: Power operated automatic double swing doors operated by an electric motor and mechanical gear assembly. Locate on active leaf of double doors. Model: Gyro Tech GT System 500.


1. Door control to be microprocessor controlled with electro-mechanical operator consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor and mechanical drive assembly.

2. Housing: Extruded aluminum fully enclosed housing, surface mounted to door frame.

C. Operation:

1. Interior: Wall mounted or recessed operating switch with tamperproof key or card reader.

2. Exterior: Stainless steel push plate switch, minimum 114 mm (4.5" ) diameter with wheelchair symbol.

3. Manual Operation: In the event of a power failure doors shall close as if equipped with a manual door closer and shall open with a force in accordance with ANSI 156.19.

D. Features:

1. Adjustable time delay.

2. Electric strike connected to operating devices.

3. Interface relay to coordinate auto opener with electric strike.

4. Automatic locking system.

5. Weather Stripping: Provide at interface between doors, frame and sidelight panels.

6. Comply with applicable standards including, but not limited to, ANSI 156.19.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gauge) minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or 0.026 inch thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected for compatibility with other components. At jambs provide end dams with soldered or welded joints.

B. Compression Weather stripping: Replaceable molded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D2287.

C. Hardware: Heavy-duty units required for operation; finish to match door. Provide manufacturer's standard. Submit hardware with shop drawing submittals. Reference Division 08710 Finish Hardware.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate to Custom Grade quality standards, except Doors shall be Premium Grade..

B. Shop prepare and identify components of assemblies for matching during site assembly.

C. When necessary cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.


2.8 FINISHING

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails.

B. For transparent finishes, use wax or burn-in filler which blends with surrounding colour and sheen, apply after stain and before final top coat.

C. Finish work in the factory in accordance with Section 1500 of QSI.

D. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.

E. Factory seal door edges with sealer compatible with finish coat to follow, specified under Section 09900 Paints and Coatings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 06200 Finish Carpentry.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 08800 CARMACKS, YUKON GLAZING APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 08800 GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide sealed units as specified in Sections:

1. 08210 Wood Doors - including wood framed entrances, entry doors and flush wood doors.

2. 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.

3. 08525 Vinyl Windows.

B. Provide single glazing to interior non-thermally broken aluminum entrances and storefront.

C. Provide accessories and sealers required for a complete installation of glazing systems.

D. Provide miscellaneous glass to hand rails and guard rails.

E. Provide unframed mirrors as indicated and specified.


A. 05500 Metal Fabrications – hand rails.

B. 08210 Wood Doors.

C. 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.

D. 08525 Vinyl Windows.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. CAN\CGSB-12.1-M90, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass.

B. CAN/CGSB-12.2-M91, Flat Clear Sheet Glass.

C. CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, Flat, Clear Float Glass.

D. CAN/CGSB-12.5-M86, Mirrors, Silvered.

E. CAN/CGSB-12.8-97, Insulating Glass Units.

F. CAN/CGSB-12.9-91, Spandrel Glass.

G. CAN/CGSB 12.10-M76, Glass, Light and Heat Reflecting.

H. CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90, Wired Safety Glass.

I. CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89, Structural Design of Glass for Buildings.

J. National Building Code of Canada, 2005, Yukon edition.

K. Flat Glass Manufacturer’s Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual.


1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design glass, glazing channels, connections, attachments and glazing accessories to withstand loads specified for guards and seismic loading in Part 4.0 of the National Building Code.

B. Design shall be prepared, signed and sealed by a Structural engineer registered in the province of British Columbia. Engineer, Province of Alberta or Yukon Territory indicating designs comply with requirements of the National Building Code.


A. Meet CGSB standards for float, tempered and laminated units. Type, thickness to conform to the British Columbia Building Code.

B. Installer: Company specializing in the installation of structural glazing with five (5) years proven experience for projects of similar size and complexity and approved by the manufacturer for installation of their projects.

C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacturing of structural glass and insulated glazing for a minimum of five (5) years.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For Low E Coatings.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings of glazed units.

D. Samples: Submit samples of door hardware for glass shower door and shelf supports to the Consultant for approval. Submit samples of obscure glass for Consultant’s selection. Submit samples of shower door glass for Consultant’s selection.

E. For sizes and locations of lights, refer to Drawings and Schedules.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with specifications, the following glass manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Canadian Pittsburgh Industries Ltd.

2. Garibaldi.

3. LOF.

4. Pilkington Glass.

5. Tempa.

6. Wescan.

7. National Glass.



2.2 GLASS

A. Thickness of Glass: Conform to National Building Code wind load requirements where applicable and according to maximum glass sizes.

B. Sealed Glazing Units: Conform to CAN\CGSB-12.8, tempered where required by National Building Code.

C. Float Glass: Glazing quality, conforming to CAN\CGSB-12.3.

D. Laminated Glass: Conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1 M90, 2 layers 6 mm tempered, with 0.015” (.4 mm) thick, clear vinyl interlayer.

E. One Way Mirrored Glass: To CAN/CGSB-12.6 Type 1 Metallic coating applied to clear glass. Class C – Tempered.

F. Fire Rated Glazing: Approved product: FireLite NT, by Torstenson Glass Company, T: 773-525-0435.

G. Safety (Tempered) Glass: Type 2, tempered, Class B, float or plate glass, conforming to CAN\CGSB-12.1. Exposed edges polished.

H. Wired Glass: Type 1 (polished both sides), Style 3 (square wire mesh), conforming to CAN\CGSB-12.11, 6mm thickness.

I. Fritted Glass: Black fritted, with solid coverage, for use in Solar Window option sealed units. Type 2, tempered, Class B, float or plate glass, conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90 with solid black fritted coating.

2.3 LOW E COATING

A. Low E Coating:

1. Viracon VE 1-2M, or VE 1-85.

2. Garibaldi Sun-Guard SN-68.


a. Minimum U Value: 0.31.

b. Shading Coefficient: 0.43.

c. Max. Reflectance(in): 13%.

d. Max. Reflectance(out): 12%.

B. Low E Coating to Windows and Storefront: South and west facing units.

1. Glass Coating: Number 2 surface Low E coating.

2. Provide separate price for provision of Low E coating to north and east facing units.

3. Provide alternate price for additional layer of Low E Coating to South and West facing units, to be applied to number 3 surface.

4. Provide alternate price for additional layer of Low E coating to North and East facing units, to be applied to number 3 surface.


2.4 SEALED UNITS

A. Sealed Units: Double glazed insulating glass units conforming to CAN / CGSB 12.1 M90 or 12.3 M91.

1. Outer Pane: 1/4 inch (6 mm), Low E coating on No. 2 surface. Colour: Clear.

2. Air Space: 1/2 inch (12 mm) argon filled.

3. Inner Pane: 1/4 inch (6 mm). Colour : Clear.

4. Primary Seal: Butyl.

5. Secondary Seal: Silicone.

6. Tempered Glazing: Provide tempered glass as indicated and as required by code.

7. Coatings: Provide Low E coating to number 2 surface.

B. Vinyl Windows: Double glazed insulating glass units conforming to CAN / CGSB 12.1 M90 or 12.3 M91. Sealed unit to be replaceable from interior side.

1. Outer Pane: 1/4 inch (6 mm), Low E coating on No. 2 surface. Colour: Clear.

2. Air Space: 1/2 inch (12 mm) argon filled.

3. Inner Pane: 1/4 inch (6 mm). Colour : Clear.

4. Primary Seal: Polyisobutylene.

5. Secondary Seal: Polysulfide.

6. Tempered Glazing: Provide tempered glass as indicated and as required by code.

7. Coatings: Provide Low E coating to number 2 surface.

C. Vinyl Windows: Triple and Quad glazed insulating glass units – refer to NORTHERM Windows – design standard

D. Clips: Mirror clips, H type, stainless steel.

E. Glazing Tape: Non-shrinking butyl rubber tape with self-adhesive surface, minimum 4.8 mm thick. Acceptable manufacturer: Tremco 440 tape; PTI 606 or approved alternative.

F. Glazing Blocks: Of neoprene (80 Durometer hardness) to give minimum 4.8 mm clearance, and as required by glass weights and light sizes.

G. Spacer Blocks: Of neoprene (80 Durometer hardness) or of nonferrous metal and designed to fully bedded in glazing materials, to give minimum 4.8 mm clearance, and as required by glass weights and light sizes.

H. Solvent Cleaner: As required for above glazing materials and as recommended by their approved manufacturer.

I. Mirrors: To CAN / CGSB 12.5 M86 Mirrors Silvered, 1/4 inch thick. Type 1-B Float glass for high humidity use.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Perform glazing in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and code requirements.

B. Install glass in frames without bending or twisting, with planes true and parallel to frame faces, with thickness or bedding even and regular all around.

C. At completion of glazing of each unit, remove surplus compounds from adjacent surfaces and glazing sections.

D. Protect materials during and after installation.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 09250 CARMACKS, YUKON GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide gypsum wallboard assemblies, plain and fire rated, to walls and ceilings.

B. Provide acoustic caulking, tape, and metal trim.

C. Provide finishing of gypsum wallboard, including taping, filling, and sanding.

D. Provide tile backer board at tub and shower surrounds.

E. Provide water resistant gypsum board behind sinks, toilets, janitor rooms and closets that contain sinks, unless indicate otherwise.




C. 07840 Firestopping.

D. 09300 Tile.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C36/C36M-01 Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.

B. ASTM C 79-94, Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board.

C. ASTM C 1002-01 Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

D. ASTM C 1047-94, Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.

E. ASTM C 1280-94, Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board.

F. ASTM C 1177-91, Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.

G. ASTM C 1178-93, Specification for Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.

H. CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction.

I. CAN/CGSB-71.25-M88, Adhesive, for Bonding Drywall to Wood Framing and Metal Studs.

J. CAN/ULC-S102-1988, Building Materials and Assemblies, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of.


A. Work of this section shall conform to B.C. Wall and Ceilings (BCWC) Specifications Standard Manual current edition and the National Building Code of Canada, 2005 Yukon edition.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be performed by a qualified specialist drywall firm with a minimum of 3 year’s experience on projects of similar size and scope.


A. Deliver and store materials undamaged in original wrappings or containers with the manufacturer's labels and seals intact.


B. Ship corner and casing beads in rigid containers and protect from damage and dampness.

C. Store wallboard flat, off the floor, protected from damage by dampness, weather or construction activities.

D. Keep cementitious materials dry and away from damp surfaces.


A. Ensure temperature of surrounding areas is within the recommended range; minimum 13 deg. C. (55 deg. F.), maximum 21 deg. C. (70 deg. F.), twenty-four (24) hours before, during and after entire gypsum wallboard and joint treatment operations. Avoid concentrated or irregular heating during drying.

B. Ensure proper ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture.

C. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory, commencement of work shall imply acceptance of conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with specifications the following Manufacturer’s are acceptable.

1. Canadian Gypsum Corporation.

2. Georgia Pacific.


2.2 GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. Gypsum Board: Conforming to ASTM C 36. Plain or fire rated to suit wall and ceiling types and provide required fire rating 15 mm (5/8") and 12 mm (1/2”) thicknesses in single or multiple layers. 4'-0" wide, in lengths as long as practical to minimize end joints. Where required, use fire rated board type "X" underwriter labeled Fireguard or approved equivalent.

B. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: Conforming to ASTM C 630 and C 1396. Plain or fire rated to suit wall and ceiling types and provide required fire rating 15 mm (5/8") and 12 mm (1/2”) thicknesses in single or multiple layers. 4'-0" wide, in lengths as long as practical to minimize end joints. Where required, use fire rated board type "X" underwriter labeled Fireguard or approved equivalent. Behind sinks, toilets, except where to be covered by tile. Moisture Guard or FireGuard by Georgia Pacific or pre-approved alternative.

C. Tile Backer Board: Conforming to ASTM C 1178. Plain and fire rated silicone treated fiberglass reinforced. Denshield Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific or approved alternative.

D. Tapes and Fillers (for Drywall): From same manufacturers or approved for use with selected gypsum board.

E. Joint Filler: Low volatile organic compound (VOC) type casein base, water mixed, slow setting, non-combustible paste for laminations and joint treatment.

F. Joint Treatment, Filler, and Topping Cement: Low VOC gyproc joint filler, premixed purpose-made water mixed, low shrinkage, non-combustible for taping and filling joints, screw heads, corner and casing beads. Special mixes for filling and finishing.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Drywall Screws: Conforming to ASTM C 1002, self-drilling, self-threading case hardened screws with Robertson type head. Penetration on Studs and Furring: minimum penetration of 12 mm (1/2”), as follows:


1. Single Layer:

12.7mm (1/2”) #6 screw 25.4 mm (1”) 15.9 mm (5/8”) #6 screw 28.6 mm (1-1/8") or 31.8 mm (1-1/4”).

2. Double Layer:

12.7mm (1/2”) #7 screw 41.3 mm (1-5/8”) 15.9 mm (5/8”) #7 screw 47.6 mm (1-7/8")

B. Corner and Casing Beads: Suit requirements of drywall conditions. Corner beads: galvanized sheet steel, not less than 26 US gauge, or P.V.C. type as manufacture by Plastic Components Inc. with perforated or expanded metal flanges. Stops and corner beads to be square type.

C. Resilient Channel: Provide acoustic resilient channel where indicated.

D. Access Panels: Locate only where approved by the Consultant. Flush door type, screwdriver operated cam locks with locking cylinder option, concealed hinges, plain or fire rated as required with integral frame for installation after wall finish is applied, complete with fixing screws and shields to suit wall type. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bilco, Maxxam, Banco or approved alternative Finishes and types as follows:

1. Drywall Standard: Prime coated for painting with walls.

2. Fire Rated: Suit wall rating.

E. Joint Treatment Materials:

1. Tape: 50.8 mm (2") spark perforated paper tape, of type recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board products.

2. Jointing Compound: Casein, vinyl or latex base; slow setting; bedding and finishing compounds of type recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board.

3. Water: Fresh, clean, potable, free from deleterious matter or alkalis.

F. Adhesive: specially formulated laminating adhesive to CAN/CGSB 71.25 ASTM C557 for laminating gypsum board to gypsum board, gypsum board to rigid insulation and gypsum board to concrete and/or masonry.

2.4 ACOUSTIC CONTROL COMPONENTS

A. Acoustic Caulking: Provide synthetic rubber acoustic sealant as specified in Section 07900 Joint Sealants.

B. Foam Tape: Self-adhesive closed cell, ¼” x 1” neoprene and/or polyvinyl chloride. Westex, NW1P or approved alternative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to start of work carefully inspect substrates to receive gypsum finishes with Installer present. Ensure surfaces are acceptable for a satisfactory installation. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Starting work shall imply acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjoining surfaces against damage resulting from work of this section.

B. Verify that plumbing, electrical and other building systems have been completed, inspected by authorities having jurisdiction and approved.


C. Do not apply drywall unless work conditions are satisfactory and building temperature is 12oC to 21oC maximum for 72 hours prior, during, and after application.

D. Avoid concentrated or irregular heat during drying. Provide ventilation to dry gypsum drywall fillers properly.

E. Partitioning systems go to underside of structural or beam elements unless specifically detailed otherwise.

F. Review Wall Types to ensure familiarity with rated separations and boarding requirements.

G. Review location for access panels with Consultant prior to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Erect Gypsum wallboard in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and wall schedule.

B. Apply at right angles to studs, or vertically with joints located over studs or furring members for fire-rated assemblies, butting edges to moderate contact in as long lengths of board as practical to minimize end joints.

C. Stagger end joints and support on framing members, space Type S screws fasteners at 12" o.c. starting at the centre of the sheet and working toward the ends.

D. Maintain a minimum of 3/8" from edges and ends of panels to screws. Apply trim in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Laminated (Two Layer Application Fireproofing):

1. Locate joints over framing members.

2. Apply second layer at right angles or parallel with first layer to suit fire rating, taking care to offset or stagger joints.

3. Laminate panels using adhesive or joint filler method to provide fire-rated assemblies and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Use screws in conjunction with adhesive or joint laminating compound.

3.4 INSTALLATION - CEILINGS

A. Apply gypsum panels of maximum practical length with long dimension at right angles to framing. Position end joints over channel web and stagger in adjacent rows. Fur ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Fasten panels with Type S screws spaced 300 mm (12") on center in field of panels and along abutting ends and edges.

3.5 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTIC CAULKING

A. Install to complete periphery of sound rated walls. Ensure surfaces to receive caulking are clean, free of dust and cleaned with compressed air or vacuums immediately prior to installation of caulking.

B. Seal perimeter joints between partitions and pipes and ducts that pass through drywall partitions, with sealant as specified.

3.6 INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES

A. Corner and Casing Bead:

1. Select to suit GWB requirements and details. Install as detailed to reveals, external angles or corners and junctions where drywall abuts other materials and to create special reveals as detailed on the drawings.


2. Installation in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Access Panels: Install in locations as required to provide access to mechanical controls, dampers, valves and cleanouts. Coordinate finish and fire rating to suit wall types.

3.7 SPECIAL SHEATHING BOARDS

A. Install sheathing board including moisture resistant and tile backer board in conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions and gypsum wall sheathing specifications of AWCC Manual. Tape and filly of joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using manufacturer’s special recommended tapes.

3.8 FINISHING

A. Finish gypsum wallboard in accordance with Section 9.6 - Part 3 Item 12.2 of the AWCC Specifications Standards Manual and as follows:

1. Level 1 for areas totally concealed from view in the finished work unless fire resistance rating requires additional finishing.

2. Level 4 for other surfaces including surfaces to receive flat or low gloss finishes. Refer to Section 09900 Paints and Coatings.

3. Level 5 at Council Chambers and as Scheduled.

3.9 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Construct control joints of two back-to back casing beads set in gypsum board facing and supported independently on both sides of joint.

B. Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints.

C. Locate control joints at changes in substrate construction and at approximately 30'-0" spacing or as indicated on drawings.

D. Install control joints straight and true.

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect the work of other trades from damage resulting from the work of this section.

B. Promptly as work proceeds and at completion, clean up and remove from the premises and the project site rubbish and surplus materials resulting from work of this section. Dispose of in a legal manner.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 09300 CARMACKS, YUKON TILE APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 09300 TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide interior ceramic floor (as noted tub area) and wall tile including related materials as scheduled and specified in washrooms.

B. Provide cove base trim at floor and wall intersections where indicated on drawings.



B. 09250 Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. CAN/CGSB 75.1-M88 Tile, Ceramic.

B. Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC) Installation Manual – Current edition.

C. Tile Council of America (TCA) Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 2003-2004 edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide product data on each material specified including installation and maintenance instructions. Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance data for tile work, for incorporation into Maintenance Manual in accordance with Division 1 requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit tiling plans giving details, special fittings, expansion joints and joint layouts.

1. Submit plans and details in sufficient time to allow for review and ordering of tiles so as not to cause a delay in the work.

D. Samples: Submit samples of tile materials in colours and sizes selected indicating quality and expected colour range.

E. Maintenance Materials: Submit 2% (but not less than 1.0 m2) of each type of tile and accessory

tiles, for the Owner's later use in maintenance, wrapped neatly and clearly marked.


A. Applicable Standards: Except as otherwise specified herein, materials shall be in accordance with CAN/CGSB-75.1.

B. Installation shall be in accordance with referenced standards and details.

C. The setting material manufacturer's representative shall review the details with the Contractor prior to the start of work. Instruct the Contractor on the proper installation procedures to ensure compliance with the guarantee requirements.


1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Arrange for production and shipment of tile materials in sufficient time to avoid delays. Substitutions will not be considered due to last minute unavailability of the tile. Extra costs incurred to ensure the timely delivery of the tile will be at the Contractor’s expense.


A. Deliver tile, grout, additives and other materials to the job site with manufacturer's labels and seals intact.

B. Properly store packaged materials, including grout materials, in a dry area and adequately protect from damage, theft and the elements.

C. Adequately protect tile during fabrication, curing, storage, transport and installation by such methods, and by such materials to prevent damage, breakage, chipping, staining or other disfigurement.

D. Protection: Packing and protective materials shall be of the type that will not cause damage, staining or other disfigurement, and the provision and maintenance of this protection shall remain the Contractor’s responsibility until the tiles are installed, complete and accepted by the Owner.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide Setting materials Manufacturer's 5 year materials and labour guarantee against break down or deterioration of the waterproof membrane and setting materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials used in this contract shall be of the highest quality as manufactured by nationally recognized manufacturers and of the type indicated on drawings and in these specifications.

.1 Laticrete International Inc.

.2 Mapei Inc.

.3 Or approved alternative.

2.2 FLOOR TILE (IF APPLICABLE)

A. Floor Tile: Skid resistant, through body, porcelain tile. Allow for two different colours.

1. Manufacturer: Olympia Tile, 604.294.2244 Fax 604.294.0528.

2. Series: Flavicker Series or approved alternative.

3. Dimensions; 8” x 8” or 4” x 4” by ¼ inch thick.


2.3 WALL TILE

A. Wall Tile: Glazed ceramic tile conforming to CAN 2-75.1 M77. Allow for 4 different colours.

1. Manufacturer: Olympia Tile, 604.294.2244 Fax 604.294.0528.

2. Series: Maple Leaf Series or approved alternative.

3. Dimensions; 4 .25” x 4.25 ” by ¼ inch thick.

4. Field Wall Tile: Allow two colours, one for each gender washroom.

5. Accent Band: 2 tiles high. Allow 2 accent colors.

2.4 MIXES AND SETTING BEDS

A. Anti Fracture Membrane: For tiles 8 inches or larger in any one dimension as recommended by tile manufacturer.

B. Mortars, General: Proportions by volume. Do not use re-tempered mortar. Tile fixing and setting beds according to the Manufacturer's instructions, the TTMAC and TCA and as specified above.

C. Mortar: Thinset mortar: Laticrete 4237 latex additive plus 211 Crete filler powder.

D. Grout: Laticrete 500 series, latex modified, sand grout. Colours to Consultant's future selection or as indicated on Finish Schedule.

E. Epoxy Grout: Lobby areas and Washroom Floors: chemical resistant epoxy grout Latapoxy SP-100 by Laticrete or pre-approved alternative.

.B Leveling Compound: as recommended by tile manufacturer and compatible with mortar and grout.

F. Water: Fresh, clean, potable, free from deleterious matter, acids or alkalis.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Sealant: In accordance with Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

B. Tile Sealer: In accordance with tile manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Edge Trim: extruded aluminum, mill finish by Schluter or pre-approved alternative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Ensure that conditions are suitable to receive membrane and tile. Correct adverse conditions prior to start of work. Commencement of the work will indicate acceptance of the surfaces to receive the tile.

B. Examine floors and walls before commencing work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Starting work shall imply acceptance of substrate surfaces.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove damaged or broken items caused by improper handling or storage.


B. Ensure materials are fresh before starting work by recommended tests on site to ensure proper, permanent bonds.

C. Ensure conditions of temperature, humidity, traffic and usage are suitable as required by Installation Manual specifications. Minimum temperature to be not less than 10°C.

D. Ensure surfaces ready to receive tiling are cured, level, graded, plumb, smooth, firm, free from loose particles, droppings, projection, grease, solvent, paint and other foreign matter and from other unsuitable conditions.

E. Ensure sub floors have been installed prior to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install tile in accordance with referenced Standard and details, manufacturer's recommendations and details and customs of best trade practices; true to lines, planes and dimensions of building.

B. Fit tile around corners, fitments, fixtures, and other built-in objects to maintain uniform joint appearance. Cut edges smooth, even and free from chipping. Edges resulting from splitting are not acceptable.

C. Joints between tile shall be uniform in width plumb, straight, evenly spaced with adjacent tile flush and planeness in accordance with surface tolerance specified.

D. Install tile on substrates as noted on drawings and specified herein utilizing specified setting materials in strict accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

E. Do not install tile to surfaces beyond such limits. Make good surfaces within limits specified prior to tile application.

F. Locate and install control joints utilizing colour match sealant at corners and where recommended by substrate and tile manufacturers and approved by the Consultant.

G. Utilize specified aluminum edge angles at transitions of tile flooring to other floor finishes.

H. Maximum tolerances in surfaces (non-cumulative when measured with a straight edge in any direction).

1. Thin-Set:

a. Vertical Surfaces: ±6.4mm (1/4") in 2.438 m (8'-0").

b. Horizontal Surfaces: 3 mm (1/8") in 3.0 m (10'-0").

I. Grout tile using specified grout in strict accordance with manufacturers written instructions to give a flush, hard joint.

J. Cure tiling and grout in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

K. Apply tile sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

L. Prepare joints and apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Clean joints to receive sealant of mortar and grout. Install backing rod if necessary at deep joints. Carefully adhere to time restrictions between coatings.

M. Apply sealant full height of vertical interior corners, full length of horizontal interior corners and at junction with adjoining surfaces/materials.


N. Apply sealant at tile penetrations, around fittings, fixtures, built-in items, services rough-ins and lines under escutcheons.

O. Surface of sealants shall be a full bead smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities; neatly tooled to a slight concave surface.

P. Refer to Section 07900 Joint Sealers for sealant application, and accessories. Note: Continuous sealant along top edge of tile transition to painted surface to be paintable type. Coordinate this requirement with Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. On completion, check work and replace defective, upset or misaligned tile. Make good skips, voids or excess grouting to the Consultant's approval.

.C Protect tiling during the work and until substantial completion of the work with recommended methods and materials.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 09650 CARMACKS, YUKON RESILIENT FLOORING APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide resilient flooring, rubber base, rubber treads with integral risers and nosing, ribbed rubber flooring for stairs, tactile warning strips, and accessories for a complete installation.

B. Seal and waxing of resilient flooring in accordance with resilient flooring manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Allow for 1 colour logo of approx 5 foot diameter to be inlaid in entrance lobby. Allow for the inset of 8-10 fish motifs (artwork) of about 16 inches across in contrasting colours in areas as indicated and scheduled.


A. Install work shall using skilled workers and to the requirements of the B.C. Floor Covering Association Manual for the types and conditions of work that apply.

B. Conform to the latest printed editions of referenced standards published by CSA, CGSB, ASTM, B.C. Floor Covering Association Manual, and applicable manufacturer's manuals.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit installation instructions.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of flooring material for the Consultant's review and approval prior to installation. Include 3 sample butterflies.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit, at completion, maintenance data, including procedures for recommended cleaning and polished materials, for specified type of resilient floor covering installed.

E. Maintenance Materials: Submit 2% of flooring installed for the Owner's later use in maintenance of floors, in original packages or factory wrappings. Sheet flooring to be maximum 2 pieces.


A. Store packaged material in original containers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with manufacturer's seals and labels intact.

B. Prevent damage to materials during handling and storage. Keep materials under cover and free from dampness.

C. Damage Protection: Store tile not more than three containers high. Store sheet goods on end and keep at 20°C temperature for at least 48 hours prior to installation.

1.5 CONDITIONS

A. Ensure temperature of surrounding areas is within the recommended range of minimum 18oC and maximum 21

oC. Avoid concentrated or irregular heating.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Resilient Sheet: Marmoleum. As distributed by Forbo

B. Rubber Products: Johnsonite, Amtico, or approved alternative

C. Rubber Treads, Risers and Nosing:

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Colour to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s standard range unless indicated otherwise.

B. Resilient Sheet: Marmoleum 3.2 mm thick homogenous sheet floor covering as by Forbo

1. Color to be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer’s standard range.

C. Non skid Resilient Sheet:

D. Rubber Base Cove: 100 mm (4 inches). Provide pre-manufactured corners, bent corners are not acceptable.

1. Colour: To be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer’s full range.

E. Rubber Treads, Risers and Nosing: Providing full coverage of tread, riser and nosing in one piece, to match rubber cove base. Nosing to have contrasting edge 50 mm wide for entire width of tread.

1. Colour: To be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer’s standard range.

F. Tactile Warning Strips: Ribbed rubber surface, provided in one piece, thickness to match resilient sheet flooring.

G. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof types low volatile organic compound (VOC) type and as recommended by resilient flooring manufactured for specific material on an applicable substrate. Adhesive for Sport Mat as per manufacturer’s written instructions – “Permabond 7000” by Lepages or “Ultrabond G 12” by Mapei.

H. Sealer and wax: Coordinate with Owner's maintenance department.

I. Leveling Compound: as recommended by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas which are to receive the work of this section with Installer present correct unsatisfactory conditions. Start work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Perform hydrology tests on new concrete slabs to ensure that the moisture content is sufficiently low to accept successful application of flooring.

3.3 INSTALLATION – GENERAL

A. Install resilient flooring in accordance with Manufacturer’s Instructions.

B. As installation progresses, roll flooring with 45 kg roller to ensure full adhesion.

C. Cut flooring neatly around fixed objects.


D. Continue flooring over areas which will be under build-in furniture.

E. Terminate flooring at center line of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar.

F. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered before initial set occurs.

G. Perform to manufacturer’s instructions, cleaning, sealing and waxing of new floors.

3.4 RESILIENT SHEET APPLICATION

A. Install sheet in accordance with Manufacturer's Instructions.

B. Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place.

C. Lay resilient sheet flooring with seams parallel to building lines to produce a minimum number of seams. Layout inlay pattern as shown on drawings.

D. Run sheets in direction of traffic. Double cut sheet joints and continuously seal according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

E. As installation progresses, and after installation, roll flooring with 45 kg minimum roller to ensure full adhesion.

F. Continue flooring at center line of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar.

G. Terminate flooring at center line for door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar.

H. Install vinyl edge strip at open edges of resilient flooring.

I. Finished floor shall be smooth and free of buckles, cracks, breaks, bubbles, waves and projecting edges.

J. Allow for cutting in of patterns.

3.5 INSTALLATION - BASE

A. Fit joints of base tight and install in longest possible lengths with horizontal minimum measurement of 500mm between joints.

B. Mitre internal corners of base. Install preformed external corner pieces.

3.6 INSTALLATION TREADS, RISERS AND NOSING

A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's Instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

.1 Protect finished work from traffic as recommended by the manufacturer.

.2 Protect other work from damage during the work of this section.

.3 Remove any excess adhesive as the work progresses.

.4 Clean and remove excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and any extraneous materials from surfaces.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 09900 CARMACKS, YUKON PAINTS AND COATINGS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide labor, materials, tools and other equipment, services and supervision required to complete all interior and exterior, including above roof, painting and decorating work as indicated on Finish Schedules and to the full extent of the drawings and specifications.

B. Surface preparation to receive painting and finishing is not included under this section of work, except for priming and back-priming and specific pre-treatments noted herein or specified in the Master Painters Institute (MPI) Painting Specification Manual, hereafter referred to as the Manual.

C. Refer to drawings and Finish Schedules for type, location and extent of finishes required, and include touch-ups and field painting necessary to complete work shown, scheduled or specified.

D. Provide low VOC paints and coatings where ever they are an option in the MPI Manual’s Approved Products list.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The Approved Products list of the MPI Manual is available on line at www.paintinfo.com.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials including primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, and solvents, shall be in accordance with the Manual “Approved Product” listing and shall be from General Paint for each system used unless noted otherwise.

B. Select paint products from the MPI Manual’s list of Approved Products and select low VOC products only. The exception to this may be alkyd paint systems for metal doors and frames and metal fabrications where selections may be made from the full range of Approved Products.

C. Other paint materials such as linseed oil or shellac shall be from the approved manufacturer listed in the Manual and shall be compatible with other coating materials as required.

D. Materials and paints shall be lead- and mercury-free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Prepare surfaces and apply paint and other materials in strict accordance with the Manual, and Manufacturer's printed specifications.

B. Prepare at the job-site, samples of each type of paint, clear finish, or other applications specified as required for approval by the Consultant.

C. Use aggregate coating or a slip resistant additive in paint for surfaces as noted such as exterior stair treads/landings, where scheduled to be painted.

3.2 EXTERIOR SURFACES

A. Paint exterior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Specification Manual requirements:

B. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: (decks)

• EXT 3.2B Acrylic deck coating.


• EXT 3.2F Alkyd zone/traffic marking finish (for parking lines)

C. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications

• EXT 5.1D Alkyd semi gloss finish.

• EXT 5.1H Epoxy / 2 component aliphatic polyurethane finish.

• EXT 5.1J High build epoxy / 2 component aliphatic polyurethane finish.

D. Galvanized Metal: (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts, gutters, flashing)

• EXT 5.3B Alkyd semi gloss finish.

• EXT 5.3C 2 component epoxy finish.

E. Glue Laminated Beams and Columns: Refer to Section 06181 Glue Laminated Units.

F. Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, siding, fencing)

• EXT 6.2E Semi-transparent stain finish.

• Logs: (Low VOC Stain) Enviro Stain Classic by Sansin /Sikkens or approved alternative.

• Exterior Logs – Sikkens Cetol (log) or equiv

G. Dressed Lumber: (including doors, door and window frames, casings, battens, smooth facias)

• EXT 6.3B Alkyd semi gloss finish at doors for transparent finish.

• EXT 6.3E Semi-transparent stain / alkyd varnish semi gloss finish.

H. Exterior Wood Siding: (plywood siding, paneling, fascias, soffits)

• EXT 6.4A Latex solid color stain finish.

• EXT 6.4B Alkyd flat gloss finish.

• EXT 6.4D Semi-transparent stain finish.

I. Wood Decks and Stairs/Steps: (using spaced lumber) (alternate price in lieu of unit pavers)

• EXT 6.5D Wood preservative / deck stain finish (for untreated wood).

3.3 INTERIOR SURFACES

A. Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Specification Manual requirements:

B. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: (floors and stairs)

• INT 3.2F Concrete floor sealer, water based. Mechanical Rooms and Janitor Rooms.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: (smooth and split face block and brick)

• INT 4.2A Latex semi gloss finish.

• INT 4.2C Alkyd semi gloss finish.

D. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications:

• INT 5.1E Alkyd semi gloss finish.


E. Galvanized Metal: (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts)

• INT 5.3C Alkyd semi gloss finish.

F. Glue Laminated Beams and Columns: Refer to Section 06181 Glue Laminated Units.

G. Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking)

• From INT 6.3 Series to match finish selected for Dressed Lumber.

H. Dressed Lumber: (including doors, door and window frames, casings, moldings)

• INT 6.3C Semi-transparent stain finish.

• INT 6.3D Semi-transparent stain / alkyd varnish satin gloss finish for wood veneer doors.

• INT 6.3J Clear alkyd varnish satin gloss finish for door and Windows Casings.

• INT 6.3R Clear waterborne acrylic satin gloss finish.

I. Wood Paneling and Casework: (partitions, panels, shelving, millwork)

• INT 6.4E Semi-transparent stain finish.

• INT 6.4F Semi-transparent stain / alkyd varnish satin gloss finish for Architectural Woodwork.

• INT 6.4J Clear alkyd varnish satin gloss finish for Council Chambers and Wall Paneling.

J. Plaster and Gypsum Board: (gypsum wallboard, drywall, “sheet rock type material”)

• INT 9.2A Latex flat gloss finish for offices, open office areas , drywall ceilings.

• INT 9.2C Alkyd for:

a. Corridors: flat gloss finish. b. Washrooms and Kitchens, including walls and ceiling: semi gloss finish. c. Activity Room/Kids Rooms: satin gloss finish. d. Janitors Closets and Mechanical Rooms: Semi gloss finish.

3.4 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Paint exposed conduits, pipes, hangers and other mechanical and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas as well as inside cupboards and cabinet work.

B. Paint both sides and all edges of plywood backboards for equipment before installation.

C. Method of paint application shall be by the accepted trade method: brush, roller, pad, spray (airless).

D. Tops, bottoms and edges of doors and trim shall be finished same as balance of doors after they are fitted by the carpenter.

E. Closets and storage rooms shall be finished the same as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified. Other surfaces shall be finished the same as nearest or adjoining surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surfaces of trim finish the same.

F. The number of coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied in strict accordance to manufacturer's recommendations. Additional coats shall be applied to obtain opaque coverage if necessary and if so required by the Consultant at no extra cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 10400 CARMACKS, YUKON IDENTIFICATION DEVICES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Exterior signage on doors and one site sign.

B. This cash allowance is for supply only, delivery, storage, handling and installation should be included elsewhere in the Contract Price.

1.2 CASH ALLOWANCE

A. Allow two thousand dollars ($ 1,750.00) for the building signage (interior + exterior) which may be expended in whole or in part under the terms of the contract as the Owner sees fit.

1.3 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY

A. Coordinate the work of this section with the work of other sections.

1.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install signage in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and reviewed and approved shop drawings, using only tamper proof methods of fastening.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 10520 CARMACKS, YUKON FIRE EXTINGUISHERS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide surface mounted fire extinguishers, cabinets and fire extinguisher mounting brackets.



B. 09250 Gypsum Board Assemblies.

C. 09900 Paints and Coatings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data and finish samples.

B. Extinguishers shall be Factory Mutual approved and UL listed.


A. ULC Listed Products: Provide new ULC listed fire extinguishers bearing ULC "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguishers indicated.

B. FM Listed Products: Fire extinguishers approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher and carry appropriate FM marking.

C. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers - Class A (Low) Hazard

1. Type: Multipurpose dry chemical type, in baked enamel finished steel case.

2. Rating: 2-A.

3. Capacity: Nominal 5 lb.

4. Service Area Mounting: Metal brackets.

5. Location: As indicated in Drawings.

6. Acceptable manufacturer: Larsen.

B. Mounting Brackets: Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION


CARMACKS, YUKON POSTAL SPECIALTIES

APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

POSTAL SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide postal specialties as indicated and specified.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Canada Post.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings showing details of fabrication and installation.


A. Deliver, store, and handle in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Jensen Aluminum; Bommer (6200 Series); Salsbury Industries; or approved.

2. Centurion Model 2600F, as manufactured by American Device Manufacturing Co.,

Steelville, IL.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Mailboxes: Front Loading, Canada Post approved Neighborhood Delivery and Collection Units.

Model 6210-74 by Bommer or approved equal.

1. Extruded aluminum framing members and doors, sheet aluminum enclosure.

2. Compartment Size: 125 mm x 900 mm x 375 mm (5” high x 6” wide x 15”) deep.

3. Door Locks: 5-pin cam type with dust/rain shield, key each lock (no master keying).

Furnish with two keys each.

4. Control Door Lock: Prepared for Canada Post lock.

5. Door Identification: Stamped numbers on each door corresponding to unit numbers.

6. Finish: Natural anodized aluminum (Bommer 628).

B. Directory: Mounting as indicated. Bommer model 6921-71.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Mail Compartments: Double walled type, sheet aluminum.

B. Frame Members: Heavy gage aluminum sections.

C. Compartment Doors: Extruded aluminum not less than 0.156” thick, reinforced at edges with

integral ribs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumb and true in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, reviewed Shop Drawings,

and as shown and specified. Comply with applicable Canada Post Publications.

B. Comply with applicable barrier-free requirements for mounting heights and maximum height

from floor to centerline of tenant locks.

END OF SECTION


CARMACKS, YUKON TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 10820

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide toilet and bath accessories as indicated, scheduled and specified.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide catalogue cuts of each item specified.


A. Coordinate Work of this Section with Work of other Sections to assure proper location of

cutouts, backing, and recess framing. Furnish templates and printed instructions as required to

prepare Work of other Sections to receive Work of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide two (2) towel bars per bathroom. If bars cannot be located in different places, locate at

same location, one at 750 mm (30”) and one at 1250 mm (50”) above finished floor Staff Bath

and in child height in kids baths . Provide child stepping stools for sinks (one ) per bath.

B.

ITEM MANUFACTURER MODEL REMARKS

Tissue Holder

Exposed Fastener

Tissue Holder

Concealed Fastener

Towel Bars –

Exposed Fastener

(2 per bathroom)

Towel Bars

Concealed Fastener

(2 per bathroom)

Shower Rod - tub


CARMACKS, YUKON TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

C.

ITEM MANUFACTURER MODEL REMARKS

Grab Bars

Grab Bars

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Verify that surfaces, recesses, and backing to receive accessories are satisfactory for their

installation.

B. Coordinate to ensure blocking is installed behind towel bars, grab bars and other items.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in locations shown and specified. Install units plumb and true.

B. Fasten accessories securely with mechanical fasteners recommended by accessory

manufacturer.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Remove protective coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Adjust accessories, as applicable, for smooth operation

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 11450 CARMACKS, YUKON APPLIANCES APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 11450 APPLIANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Install Owner supplied residential kitchen appliances and laundry equipment.

B. Quality Assurance: Appliances shall be CSA approved.

C. Hook up and hard wiring of appliances shall be included in the Contract.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's standard literature showing size requirements and hook up instructions, installation and maintenance instructions.

B. Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty and Operation Manuals and submit in accordance with Section 01770 Closeout Procedures.


A. Deliver and store materials undamaged and where applicable in their original wrappings or containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. Store materials on a dry floor in a weatherproof enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Uncrate appliances and set into place and hook up in accordance with appliance manufacturer's recommendations.

B. At completion of work remove accumulated containers, crating materials and rubbish and deposit in recycling containers provided or dispose of in legal manner.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 12490 CARMACKS, YUKON WINDOW TREATMENTS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 1

SECTION 12490 WINDOW TREATMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide horizontal window blinds at windows and doors with accessories for attachment, for a complete installation. All child rooms, dining area, activity area, . High triangular and circular windows excluded.


A. 08210 Wood Doors.

B. 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.

C. 08800 Glazing.

D. 08520 Vinyl Windows.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:

1. Submit complete product literature.

2. Submit cleaning, and maintenance instructions as specified in Section 01770 Closeout Procedures.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit copy of floor plan which includes windows to receive blinds. Indicate proposed location of tilt wands at each location.

D. Samples: Submit blind colour samples for selection.


A. Installer Qualifications: A minimum of three (3) years experience in the installation of blind systems of the type specified.

B. Mock-up:

1. Provide mock-ups in accordance with Owner’s requirements.

2. Mount one window blind of each type as specified in a location on site as directed by the Owner.

3. Provide additional mounting locations as directed by the Owner, until approval is obtained.

4. Remount unacceptable mock-ups to conform to approved mock-up.

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 12490 CARMACKS, YUKON WINDOW TREATMENTS APRIL, 2010 PAGE 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL BLINDS

A. Acceptable Products:

1. "Riviera Contract 1 inch Blind" by Levolor, 800/221-6803 or approved alternative.

B. Provide manufacturer's standard product with the following features:

1. Prefinished 25 mm (1 inch) wide aluminum slats; standard color as selected by the Consultant.

2. Top locking cord locks.

3. Hold down system at operable swing doors (patio doors).

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate units to fit openings indicated, from head to sill and from mullion to mullion. Size to allow smooth operation of the unit.

B. Fabricate elements to integrate with adjacent construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades with installer present and verify that work of this Section may properly commence. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install window blinds in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Use non corrosive fasteners for installation, conceal in final assembly.

C. At swing doors, mount horizontal blinds to the door.

D. Mount horizontal blinds at exterior glazed openings in windows and at exterior patio doors.

E. Adjust parts for smooth operation.

END OF SECTION

LSCFN DAYCARE CENTRE SECTION 17500 CARMACKS, YUKON APPENDICES APRIL, 2010

SECTION 17500

APPENDICES

A. Room Schedule

B. Door Schedule

C. Window Schedule

Dunema Zra Sanchi’i Ku Daycare Centre · Additional copies may be ordered from Intergraphics...

Documents

Transcript of Dunema Zra Sanchi’i Ku Daycare Centre · Additional copies may be ordered from Intergraphics...